Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

If your camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later, use Creators’ App on your smartphone. Imaging Edge
Mobile cannot be used. For details on Creators’ App, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/

Recommended pages in the Help Guide

Finding functions from MENU

You can check the list of the menu items. You can also move to the explanation page for each item from the menu
item on the list.

Log Shooting Setting

Configures the settings for Log shooting.

Using the Main menu (shooting setting list)

Select the (Main) tab on the menu screen to display a list of shooting settings.

Support information

Firmware, Questions & Answers and Compatibility

This website provides Firmware update, Question & Answers and Compatibility information

Basic Knowledge

Improve your shooting techniques by learning the basics of camera.

How to use the “Help Guide”

Before Use

Checking the camera and the supplied items

Memory cards that can be used

Notes on using your camera

Precautions

1
 Lending, transferring or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others (Notes on protecting private information)

Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

Notes on memory card

Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)

On cleaning

Names of parts

Front side

Rear side

Top side

Sides

Bottom

XLR handle unit

Basic icons displayed on the monitor

Basic operations

Touch operations on the monitor

Using the control wheel

Using the multi-selector

Using the MODE (Mode) button

Using the menu

Using the Main menu (shooting setting list)

Using the function menu

Using the custom buttons

Using the DISP (Display Setting) button

Using the Delete button

Using the front dial and rear dial

Using the keyboard

In-Camera Guide

Preparing the camera/Basic shooting operations

2
Charging the battery pack

Charging the battery pack using a charger

Inserting/removing the battery pack

Charging the battery with a commercially available AC adaptor or mobile battery

Using the battery charger abroad

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Inserting/removing a memory card

Attaching/removing a lens

Attaching the supplied XLR handle unit

Performing initial setup for the camera

Basic shooting operations

Confirmation before shooting

Shooting movies

Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)

Finding functions from MENU

Using the shooting functions

Contents of this chapter

Selecting a shooting mode

Exposure Ctrl Type

Auto/Manual Swt. Set.

Movie: Exposure Mode

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

Intelligent Auto

Program Auto

Aperture Priority

Shutter Priority

Manual Exposure

Bulb shooting

Auto Slow Shutter

3
Focusing

Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)

Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

Manual Focus

Direct manual focus (DMF)

Face/Eye AF

Focusing on human eyes

Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)

Face/Eye Subject (still image/movie)

Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)

Face/Eye Frame Disp. (still image/movie)

Face Memory

Regist. Faces Priority (still image/movie)

Using focusing functions

Focus Standard

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)

Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)

AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)

Focus Area Color (still image/movie)

AF Area Auto Clear

AF-C Area Display

Phase Detect. Area

AF Tracking Sensitivity

AF Transition Speed

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity

4
 AF Assist

AF/MF Selector

AF w/ Shutter

AF On

Focus Hold

Pre-AF

Priority Set in AF-S

Priority Set in AF-C

AF Illuminator

Aperture Drive in AF

AF in Focus Mag.

Auto Magnifier in MF

Focus Magnifier

Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Peaking Display

Adjusting the exposure/metering modes

Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

Histogram display

Exposure step (still image/movie)

Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)

D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)

Metering Mode (still image/movie)

Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)

Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)

AE lock

AEL w/ Shutter

Zebra Display

5
Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO (still image/movie)

ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)

ISO AUTO Min. SS

White balance

White Balance (still image/movie)

Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)

Shutter AWB Lock

Shockless WB

Log shooting settings

Log shooting

Log Shooting Setting

Select LUT

Manage User LUTs

Base ISO

Exposure Index

Display LUT

Adding effects to images

Creative Look (still image/movie)

Picture Profile (still image/movie)

Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)

Drive Mode

Cont. Shooting

Self-timer(Single)

Self-timer(Cont)

Cont. Bracket

Single Bracket

Indicator during bracket shooting

6
 WB bracket

DRO Bracket

Bracket Settings

Interval Shoot Func.

Setting the image quality and recording format

JPEG/HEIF Switch

Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)

Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type

Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality

Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size

Aspect Ratio

HLG Still Image

Color Space

File Format (movie)

Movie Settings (movie)

S&Q Settings

Proxy Settings

APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)

Angle of view

Using touch functions

Touch Operation

Touch Sensitivity

Swipe Up

Touch Func. in Shooting

Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)

Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)

Shutter settings

Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)

Shutter Type

7
 e-Front Curtain Shut.

Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)

Release w/o Card

Anti-flicker Shoot.

Using the zoom

The zoom features available with this product

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

Zoom Range (still image/movie)

Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)

Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)

Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)

About zoom scale

Zoom Ring Rotate

Using the flash

Using flash (sold separately)

Flash Mode

Flash Comp.

Exp.comp.set

Wireless Flash

Red Eye Reduction

FEL lock

External Flash Set.

Reducing blur

SteadyShot (still image)

SteadyShot (movie)

SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)

SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)

Lens Compensation (still image/movie)

Noise reduction

8
 Long Exposure NR

High ISO NR

Setting the monitor display during shooting

Auto Review (still image)

Remain Shoot Display (still image)

Grid Line Display (still image/movie)

Grid Line Type (still image/movie)

Live View Display Set.

Aperture Preview

Shot. Result Preview

Bright Monitoring

Emphasized REC Display

Marker Display

Gamma Display Assist

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

De-Squeeze Display

Recording movie audio

Audio Recording

Audio Rec Level

Audio Out Timing

Wind Noise Reduct.

Shoe Audio Set.

Recording audio using the XLR adaptor of the supplied handle

TC/UB settings

TC/UB

TC/UB Disp. Setting

Matching the time code with other devices

Customizing the camera

Contents of this chapter

9
Customization features of the camera

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Registering and recalling camera settings

Camera Set. Memory

Recall Camera Setting

Memory/Recall Media

Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

Registering frequently used functions to the function menu

Fn Menu Settings

Registering frequently used functions to My Menu

Add Item

Sort Item

Delete Item

Delete Page

Delete All

Display From My Menu

Separately adjusting the camera settings for still images and movies

Different Set for Still/Mv

Customizing the functions of the ring/dial

Av/Tv Rotate

Function Ring(Lens)

Lock Operation Parts

Recording movies by pressing the shutter button

REC w/ Shutter (movie)

Monitor settings

Monitor Flip Direction

DISP (Screen Disp) Set

Viewing

10
Contents of this chapter

Viewing images

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Playing back still images

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Playing back movies

Volume Settings

4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Cont. Play for Interval

Play Speed for Interval

Changing how images are displayed

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Display as Group

Focus Frame Display (playback)

Disp Specified Time Img.

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Protecting recorded images (Protect)

Adding information to images

Rating

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Extracting still images from a movie

Photo Capture

JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture)

11
Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)

Deleting images

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

Delete pressing twice

Delete confirm.

Viewing images on a TV

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

Changing the camera settings

Memory card settings

Format

Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)

Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)

Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media

Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

Display Media Info. (still image/movie)

File settings

File/Folder Settings

Select REC Folder

Create New Folder

File Settings

Display File Name (movie)

IPTC Information

Copyright Info

Write Serial Number (still image/movie)

Network settings

Wi-Fi Connect

WPS Push

Access Point Set.

Wi-Fi Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

12
 Display Wi-Fi Info.

SSID/PW Reset

Bluetooth Settings

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

Wired LAN (USB-LAN)

USB-LAN/Tethering

Airplane Mode

Edit Device Name

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Access Authen. Settings

Access Authen. Info

Security(IPsec)

Reset Network Set.

FTP Transfer Func.

Monitor settings

Monitor Brightness

Power settings

Power Save Start Time

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Fan Control (movie)

Display Quality

USB settings

USB Connection Mode

USB LUN Setting

USB Power Supply

External output settings

HDMI Resolution

HDMI Output Settings (movie)

HDMI Info. Display

CTRL FOR HDMI

13
General settings

Language

Area/Date/Time Setting

NTSC/PAL Selector

Audio signals

REC Lamp

Video Light Mode

IR Remote Ctrl

Auto Pixel Mapping

Pixel Mapping

Version

Display Serial Number

Save/Load Settings

Setting Reset

Functions available with a smartphone

Functions available with a smartphone (Creators’ App)

C3 Portal

Monitor & Control

Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)

Using a smartphone as a remote commander

Using a smartphone as a remote commander

Remote Shoot Setting

Transferring images to a Smartphone

Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)

Reset Transfer Status (transferring to a smartphone)

Connecting while the camera is turned OFF

Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)

Reading location information from a smartphone

Using a computer

14
Recommended computer environment

Connecting/disconnecting the camera and a computer

Connecting the camera to a computer

Disconnecting the camera from the computer

Managing and editing images on a computer

Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)

Importing images to the computer

Operating the camera from a computer

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

Remote Shoot Setting

Appendix

Audio accessories compatible with the Multi Interface Shoe

Mount Adaptor

Mount Adaptor

LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor

LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

Multi Battery Adaptor Kit

Battery life and number of recordable images

Number of recordable images

Recordable movie times

List of icons on the monitor

List of icons on the screen for shooting movies

List of icons on the screen for shooting still images

List of icons on the playback screen

List of default setting values

Specifications

Trademarks

License

If you have problems

15
Troubleshooting

Warning messages

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

16
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

How to use the “Help Guide”

The “Help Guide” is a “Web Instruction Manual” that has been designed to describe the functions and operating methods
of this camera. Use the “Help Guide” to search for any information that you require in order to make full use of the
camera.
(The “Help Guide” screens shown on this page are for reference only. They may differ from the actual on-screen display
of your model.)

Hint
The “Startup Guide” supplied with the camera describes basic operating methods and precautions for use. Please refer to the
“Startup Guide” in combination with this “Help Guide.”

Icons used in the “Help Guide”

: Menu items displayed in the still image shooting modes
: Menu items displayed in the movie recording modes and slow-motion/quick-motion shooting modes
: Menu items displayed in any of the still image shooting modes, movie recording modes, or slow-
motion/quick-motion shooting modes
For details on each shooting mode, refer to “Using the menu.”

Finding your desired information

Method A: Searching by keyword

Enter a search keyword (“white balance,” “focus area,” etc.), and use the search results to display the description page
that you want to view. If you enter two or more keywords by separating them with spaces (blanks), you can search for
pages that contain all of those keywords.

Method B: Viewing the table of contents

Select a heading from the table of contents to display the description page.

Screen displayed on a computer

Screen displayed on a smartphone

17
Method C: Finding functions from MENU
If you want to search for information while checking it against the MENU screen of the camera, use the “Finding
functions from MENU” page. Select a MENU item from the list to go directly to the description page.

Viewing information about related features

“Related Topic” at the bottom of each page lists sections that contain information related to the description page currently
being displayed. For a deeper understanding of the currently displayed page, refer to the listed sections as well.

Printing all the pages of the “Help Guide”

18
To print all the pages, select the [ Printable PDF] button in the upper right corner of the top page. When the PDF file
appears, use the printing menu of the browser to print it out.
This function is not available for certain languages.

Printing only the currently displayed page (only on a computer)

To print only the page currently being displayed, select the [ Print] button at the top of the page. When the printing
screen appears, specify your printer.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

19
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Checking the camera and the supplied items

The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.

Camera (1)
Battery Charger (1)

Power cord (mains lead) (1)* (supplied in some countries/regions)

* Multiple power cords may be supplied with your camera. Use the appropriate one that matches your country/region.
NP-FZ100 Rechargeable Battery Pack (1)

USB Type-C cable (1)

Body Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)

Shoe Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)

XLR handle unit (1)

20
Accessory shoe kit (Accessory shoe (1), accessory shoe plate (1), screws (4))

Handle shoe cap (1) (attached to the handle)

Startup Guide (1)

Reference Guide (1)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

21
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Memory cards that can be used

This camera supports CFexpress Type A memory cards and SD memory cards (UHS-I, UHS-II compatible).
When using microSD memory cards with this camera, be sure to use the appropriate adaptor.

For still-image shooting

The following memory cards can be used.

CFexpress Type A memory cards

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards

For movie recording

Movie recording formats and compatible memory cards are as follows.

File Format Maximum recordable bit rate Supported memory card

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC HS 4K 280Mbps SDXC V60 or higher*1

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S 4K 280Mbps SDXC V60 or higher*1

CFexpress Type A memory card

XAVC S HD 100Mbps SDHC/SDXC card (U3 or higher)*1

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S-I 4K 600Mbps SDXC V90 or higher

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S-I HD 222Mbps SDXC V90 or higher

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S-I DCI 4K*2 600Mbps SDXC V90 or higher

*1 When the recording bit rate is 60 Mbps or lower, you can also record to an SDHC/SDXC card (Class 10).
*2 When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

For S&Q Motion shooting

File formats and compatible memory cards are as follows.
In slow-motion recording, the recording bit rate is higher than usual. You may need a memory card that can be written at
a higher speed.

22
 File Format Maximum recordable bit rate Supported memory card

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC HS 4K 500Mbps SDXC V60 or higher*1

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S 4K 560Mbps SDXC V60 or higher*1

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S HD 500Mbps SDXC V60 or higher*2

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S-I 4K 1200Mbps SDXC V90 or higher*3

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S-I HD 890Mbps SDXC V90 or higher*4

CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher)

XAVC S-I DCI 4K*5 600Mbps SDXC V90 or higher*3

*1 When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you may need an SDXC V90 memory card.
*2 When [ Frame Rate] is set to [240fps]/[200fps], you may need an SDXC V90 memory card.
*3 For slow-motion recording, a CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher) is required.
*4 When [ Frame Rate] is set to [240fps]/[200fps], a CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or higher) is required.
*5 When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

Hint
When the recording bit-rate is 200 Mbps, you can also record using an SDXC card (U3/V30).

Note
When shooting a proxy movie, a higher-speed memory card may be required.

CFexpress Type B memory cards cannot be used.

When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over extended periods of time, the recorded movies will be
divided into files 4 GB in size.

When recording a movie on memory cards in both the Slot 1 and the Slot 2, insert two memory cards with the same file system.
Movies cannot be recorded simultaneously when using a combination of the exFAT file system and FAT32 file system.

Memory card File system

CFexpress Type A memory card, SDXC memory card exFAT

SDHC memory card FAT32

Charge the battery pack sufficiently before attempting to recover the database files on the memory card.

Related Topic
Notes on memory card

23
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times
S&Q Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

24
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Precautions

Refer also to “Notes on use” in the Startup Guide (supplied) for this product.

On the data specifications described in this manual

The data on performance and specifications in this manual are based on an ordinary ambient temperature of 25ºC
(77°F), except where otherwise indicated.
For the battery pack, the data are based on a battery pack that was fully charged until the charge lamp turned off.

On operating temperatures

Shooting in extremely cold or hot environments that exceed the operating temperature range is not recommended.
Under high ambient temperatures, the temperature of the camera rises quickly.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the image quality may deteriorate. It is recommended that you wait until
the temperature of the camera drops before continuing to shoot.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the camera may become unable to record movies or the power
may turn off automatically to protect the camera. A message will be displayed on the screen before the power turns
off or you can no longer record movies. In this case, leave the power off and wait until the camera and battery
temperature goes down. If you turn on the power without letting the camera and battery cool sufficiently, the power
may turn off again, or you may still be unable to record movies.

Notes on recording for long periods of time or recording 4K movies

Especially during 4K shooting, the recording time may be shorter under low temperature conditions. Warm up the battery
pack or replace it with a new battery.

Notes on playing movies on other devices

XAVC HS and XAVC S movies can only be played back on compatible devices.

Notes on recording/playback

Before you start recording, make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with
other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.
Sony can provide no guarantees in the event of failure to record, or loss of or damage to recorded images or audio
data, due to a malfunction of the camera or recording media, etc. We recommend backing up important data.
Once you format the memory card, all the data recorded on the memory card will be deleted and cannot be restored.
Before formatting, copy the data to a computer or other device.

Backing up memory cards

Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.

When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned off in the middle of a
read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.

Database file error

25
 If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and turn on the power, the
product automatically creates an image database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may
take a long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer, and then format the memory card using this
product.

Do not use/store the product in the following places

In an extremely hot, cold or humid place

In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and this may cause a
malfunction.
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.
In a location subject to rocking vibration
It may cause malfunctions and an inability to record data. In addition, the recording media may become unusable,
and recorded data may be corrupted.
Near strong magnetic place
In sandy or dusty places
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to malfunction, and in some cases
this malfunction cannot be repaired.
In places with high humidity
This may cause the lens to mold.
In areas where strong radio waves or radiation are being emitted
Recording and playback may not function correctly.

On moisture condensation

If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside or outside the
product. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm location, first put it in a
plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has
reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that
if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.

Precaution on carrying

Do not hold, hit, or apply excessive force to the following parts, if your camera is equipped with them:

The lens part

The movable monitor part
The movable flash part
The movable viewfinder part

Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to break.
Do not sit down in a chair or other place with the camera in the back pocket of your trousers or skirt, as this may
cause malfunction or damage the camera.

Notes on handling the product

Before you connect the cable to the terminal, be sure to check the orientation of the terminal. Then, insert the cable
straight. Do not insert or remove the cable forcefully. This may cause the terminal part to break.
The camera uses magnetic parts including magnets. Do not bring objects affected by magnetism, including credit
cards and floppy disks, close to the camera.
The recorded image may be different from the image you monitored before recording.

On storing

26
 For lens-integrated cameras
Always attach the lens cap when you are not using the camera. (Only for models supplied with a lens cap)
For interchangeable-lens cameras
Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent dust or debris from
getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it to the camera.
If the camera is dirty after use, clean it. Water, sand, dust, salt, etc. left in the camera may cause a malfunction.

Notes on using lenses

When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects caught in the lens. (Only for
models with a power zoom feature or interchangeable lens cameras)
If you must place the camera under a light source such as sunlight, attach the lens cap to the camera. (Only for
models supplied with a lens cap or interchangeable lens cameras)
If sunlight or a strong light source enters the camera through the lens, it may focus inside the camera and cause
smoke or fire. Attach the lens cap to the lens when storing the camera. When you shoot with backlighting, keep the
sun sufficiently far away from the angle of view. Note that smoke or fire may occur even if the light source is slightly
away from the angle of view.
Do not directly expose the lens to beams such as laser beams. These may damage the image sensor and cause the
camera to malfunction.
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth,
etc.

Notes on the flash (Only for models with a flash)

Keep your fingers away from the flash. The light-emitting part may get hot.
Remove any dirt from the surface of the flash. Dirt on the surface of the flash may emit smoke or burn due to heat
generated by the emission of light. If there is dirt/dust, clean it off with a soft cloth.
Restore the flash to its original position after using it. Make sure that the flash portion is not sticking up. (Only for
models with a movable flash)

Notes on the Multi Interface Shoe (Only for models with a Multi Interface Shoe)

When attaching or detaching accessories such as an external flash to the Multi Interface Shoe, first turn the power to
OFF. When attaching the accessory, confirm that it is firmly fastened to the camera.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltages of 250 V or more or has
the opposite polarity of the camera. It may cause a malfunction.

Notes on the viewfinder and flash (Only for models with a viewfinder or a flash)

Take care that your finger is not in the way when pushing the viewfinder or flash down. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
If water, dust or sand adheres to the viewfinder or flash unit, it may cause a malfunction. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)

Notes on the viewfinder (Only for models with a viewfinder)

When shooting with the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eyestrain, fatigue, travel sickness, or
nausea. We recommend that you take a break at regular intervals when you are shooting with the viewfinder.
In case you may feel uncomfortable, refrain from using the viewfinder until your condition recovers, and consult your
doctor if necessary.
Do not forcibly push down the viewfinder when the eyepiece is pulled out. It may cause a malfunction. (Only for
models with a movable viewfinder and an eyepiece that can be pulled out)
If you pan the camera while looking into the viewfinder or move your eyes around, the image in the viewfinder may
be distorted or the color of the image may change. This is a characteristic of the lens or display device and is not a
malfunction. When you shoot an image, we recommend that you look at the center area of the viewfinder.
The image may be slightly distorted near the corners of the viewfinder. This is not a malfunction. When you want to
see the full composition with all its details, you can also use the monitor.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.

27
 Do not directly expose the viewfinder to beams such as laser beams. These may damage the inside of the viewfinder
and cause the camera to malfunction.

Notes on the monitor

Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor stays wet, the surface of
the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a malfunction.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
When you connect cables to the terminals on the camera, the rotating range of the monitor may become limited.

Notes on the image sensor

If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted
areas in the images may be recorded as black areas.

Notes on the cooling fan

Do not cover the air vent.

The air vent may get hot.
Do not use the camera in areas where there are dust or sand particles in the air.
If the cooling fan emits abnormal noises, stop using the camera and contact a service facility.

On image data compatibility

This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).

Services and software provided by other companies

Network services, content, and the [operating system and] software of this Product may be subject to individual terms
and conditions and changed, interrupted or discontinued at any time and may require fees, registration and credit card
information.

Notes on connecting to the internet

To connect the camera to a network, connect it through a router or a LAN port with the same function. Failure to connect
in this manner may result in security issues.

Notes on security

SONY WILL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT
PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS CAUSED BY
TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR OTHER SECURITY PROBLEMS.
Depending on the usage environment, unauthorized third parties on the network may be able to access the product.
When connecting the camera to a network, be sure to confirm that the network is protected securely.
The content of communications may be unknowingly intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the vicinity of the
signals. When using wireless LAN communication, implement proper security measures to protect the content of
communications.

Notes on the FTP function

Since content, usernames, and passwords are not encrypted using normal FTP, use FTPS if it is available.

Optional accessories

It is recommended that you use genuine Sony accessories.

Some Sony accessories are only available in certain countries and regions.

28
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

29
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Lending, transferring or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others (Notes
on protecting private information)

Important information may be recorded on the camera and/or memory card depending on the functions and camera
settings.
Before lending, transferring, or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others, be sure to read the following and
make sure that you have completed the procedures.

Notes on lending, transferring, or discarding the camera to others

Before lending, transferring, or discarding the camera to others, be sure to perform the following operation to protect
private information.

Select [Setting Reset] → [Initialize].

Notes on lending, transferring, or discarding a memory card to others

Executing [Format] or [Delete] on the camera or a computer may not completely delete the data on the memory card.
Before lending or transferring a memory card to others, we recommend that you delete any data on it completely using
data deletion software. When discarding a memory card, we recommend that you physically destroy it.

Notes on network functions

When you use network functions, unintended third parties on the network may access the camera, depending on the
usage environment. For example, unauthorized access to the camera may occur in network environments to which
another network device is connected or can connect without permission. Sony bears no responsibility for any loss or
damage caused by connecting to such network environments.

Notes on location information

If you upload and share still images or movies taken with this camera on the Internet while the location information is
linked with the dedicated smartphone application, you may accidentally reveal the location information to a third party. To
prevent third parties from obtaining your location information, deactivate the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the dedicated application.

Warning on copyrights

Television programs, films, videotapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such
materials may be contrary to the provisions of the copyright laws.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

30
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

Notes on using the battery pack

Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs.

The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.

Notes on charging the battery pack

Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack each time
before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities to shoot images.
Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can result in leaks,
overheating, explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.
When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long time, the charge
lamp (CHARGE) may flash quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the battery pack and then
re-insert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).
The battery pack may not be correctly charged in temperatures outside this range.
Operation cannot be guaranteed with all external power supplies.
After charging is finished, disconnect the charger from the wall outlet (wall socket) if charging with a charger, or
disconnect the USB cable from the camera if charging the battery pack while it is inserted into the camera. Not doing
so may result in a shorter battery life.
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged or close to fully
charged. Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged, and then insert the
same battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or
that a battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or different one and check that
the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously
inserted battery may be faulty.

Remaining battery indicator

The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen. It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery
indicator to appear.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button to display it.

Effective use of the battery pack

Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the operational time of the
battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket
close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any
metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.
The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function frequently, turn the power
on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual shots.

31
 If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack may not be properly
charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.

How to store the battery pack

To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the camera at least once a
year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after removing it from the camera.

On battery life

The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for a long period, the
battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time
to replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating conditions and environment in
which each battery pack is used.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

32
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Notes on memory card

If (overheating warning icon) is displayed on the monitor, do not remove the memory card from the camera right
away. Instead, wait for a while after turning off the camera, and then remove the memory card. If you touch the
memory card while it is hot, you may drop it and the memory card may be damaged. Be careful when removing the
memory card.
If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in the memory card may
occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a
computer or other storage location, then execute [Format] using this camera.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the camera off while the
access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to become damaged.
Be sure to back up the data for protection.
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
Images recorded on an SDXC/CFexpress Type A memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers or AV
devices not compatible with exFAT when connected using a USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with
exFAT before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be
prompted to format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the
card.
(exFAT is the file system used on SDXC memory cards or CFexpress Type A memory cards.)
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present

If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations subject to static electricity or
electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become damaged.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally swallow it.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when you handle it.
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product. Be sure to format the memory
card using this product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the equipment used.
Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor. You may not be able to remove the
memory card.
If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of an SD memory card is set to the LOCK position, you cannot
record or delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record position.
To use a microSD memory card with this product:
Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card into the product without a
memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from the product.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card is inserted in the
correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a
malfunction.

Related Topic

33
Format

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

34
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to
an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,
clean the image sensor quickly by following the steps below.

1 Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.

2 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Sensor Cleaning] → [Enter].

The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.

3 Turn off the camera following the instructions on the screen.

4 Detach the lens.

5 Use a commercially available blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.

Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.

6 Attach the lens.

Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the
following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php

Note
Make sure that the remaining battery level is 51% or more before performing [Sensor Cleaning].

Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.

Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image
sensor.

When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product
may be damaged.

35
 If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.

During cleaning, the image sensor emits a vibrating noise. This is not a malfunction.

Cleaning may be performed automatically when the power is turned off.

Related Topic
Attaching/removing a lens

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

36
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

On cleaning

Cleaning the lens

Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case of dust that sticks to the
surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral
pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.

Cleaning the camera body

Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal contact. To clean inside the lens
mount, use a commercially available blower* to blow any dust off.
* Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.

Cleaning the product surface

Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To
prevent damage to the finish or casing:

Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent,
sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.

Cleaning the monitor

If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the monitor may be scratched.
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the surface, and then clean the
monitor using soft cloth, etc.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

37
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Front side

1. 1 button (Custom button 1)/IRIS (Iris) button

2. Shutter button
3. W/T (zoom) lever
4. Front dial
You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.

5. Infrared remote sensor

6. WLAN antenna (built-in)
Wi-Fi communication may be blocked if you cover this part with your hand, etc.

7. Lens release button

8. AF illuminator/Self-timer lamp/Visible light and IR sensor
Do not cover this part during shooting.

9. Recording lamp
10. 6 button (Custom button 6)/REC (Recording) button
11. Mounting index
12. Image sensor*
13. Mount
14. Lens contacts*

* Do not directly touch these parts.

38
Related Topic
Rear side
Top side
Sides
Bottom

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

39
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Rear side

1. Power switch
2. Monitor/Touch panel
You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.

(A): Approx. 176°

(B): Approx. 270°

You may not be able to adjust the monitor angle depending on the type of a tripod you use. In such a case,
release the tripod screw once to adjust the monitor angle.
Do not apply excessive force when opening, closing, or rotating the monitor. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

3. MODE (Mode) button

4. Recording lamp
5. MENU button
6. Rear dial
You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.

7. 5 button (Custom button 5)/FOCUS MAG (Focus magnifier) button

8. Fn (Function) button
9. Control wheel
10. Access lamp

40
11. For shooting: 4 button (Custom button 4)
For viewing: (Delete) button
12. (Playback) button
13. Speaker

Related Topic
Front side
Top side
Sides
Bottom

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

41
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Top side

1. Multi Interface Shoe*

Some accessories may not go in all the way and protrude backward from the Multi interface shoe. However, when
the accessory reaches the front end of the shoe, the connection is completed.

2. Microphone
Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.

3. REC (Recording) button

When recording is started by pressing the REC (Recording) button, the button lights up in red.

4. Multi-selector
5. Image sensor position mark

The image sensor is the sensor that converts light into an electric signal. The position of the image sensor is
indicated by (Image sensor position mark). When you measure the exact distance between the camera and
the subject, refer to the position of the horizontal line.

If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot be confirmed. Make sure
you put enough distance between the subject and the camera.

6. 3 button (Custom button 3)/ISO (ISO sensitivity) button

42
 7. 2 button (Custom button 2)/WB (White balance) button
8. Thread holes for accessories
Support 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use an accessory with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you will be unable to firmly secure
the accessory, and damage to the camera may occur.

* Accessories for the Accessory Shoe can also be used. Operations with other manufacturers’ accessories are not guaranteed.

Related Topic
Front side
Rear side
Sides
Bottom

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

43
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Sides

1. Hooks for shoulder strap (sold separately)

2. Thread hole for accessories
Supports 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use an accessory with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you will be unable to firmly secure
the accessory, and damage to the camera may occur.

3. HDMI type A jack

4. WLAN antenna (built-in)
Wi-Fi communication may be blocked if you cover this part with your hand, etc.

5. (Microphone) jack
When an external microphone is connected, the built-in microphone and the XLR handle unit turn off automatically.
When the external microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the microphone is supplied by the camera.

6. (Headphones) jack
7. USB Type-C terminal
8. Charge lamp
9. Multi/Micro USB Terminal
This terminal supports Micro USB-compatible devices.

10. Ventilation outlet

Do not use the camera while touching the area around the ventilation outlet for a long time. Doing so may cause low-
temperature burns.

44
11. (N-Mark)
The camera cannot be connected to a smartphone using the NFC function if the camera’s system software
(firmware) is Ver.2.0 or later.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.

12. SLOT 1 (Memory card slot 1)

13. SLOT 2 (Memory card slot 2)

Notes on USB terminals

You can use either the USB Type-C terminal or the Multi/Micro USB Terminal for USB communications. However, you
cannot conduct USB communications with both terminals simultaneously. Use the USB Type-C terminal to supply power
and charge the battery pack. This camera cannot be powered via the Multi/Micro USB terminal.

You can use accessories for the Multi/Micro USB Terminal, such as a remote commander (sold separately), while
supplying power or performing PC Remote shooting using the USB Type-C terminal.

Notes on the terminal cover

Ensure that the terminal cover is closed before use.

Related Topic
Front side
Rear side
Top side
Bottom

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

45
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Bottom

1. Lock lever
2. Battery insertion slot
3. Battery cover
Before attaching an accessory such as the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit (sold separately), remove the battery cover.

To remove the battery cover

Pull the battery cover release lever (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the battery cover.

To attach the battery cover

Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by
attaching the shaft on the opposite side.

46
4. Ventilation inlet
Do not cover the ventilation inlet.

5. Tripod socket hole

Supports 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may occur.

Related Topic
Front side
Rear side
Top side
Sides

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

47
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

XLR handle unit

Body parts

1. Microphone holder
2. Cable holder
3. Attachment screws
4. Multi Interface foot

Switches and dials

48
 1. ATT (INPUT1) switch
Select the standard input level of the INPUT1 jack. This switch setting is active when the INPUT1
(LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V.”

2. INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch

Select the option suitable for the device connected to the INPUT1 jack.

3. ATT (INPUT2) switch

Select the standard input level of the INPUT2 jack. This switch setting is active when the INPUT2
(LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V.”

4. INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch

Select the option suitable for the device connected to the INPUT2 jack.

5. LOW CUT (INPUT1) switch

Use this switch to minimize unwanted noise by attenuating low-frequency components of the input audio from the
INPUT1 jack.

6. AUTO/MAN (INPUT3) switch

Select the method (Auto/Manual) for adjusting the volume level of the input audio from the INPUT3 jack.

7. AUTO/MAN (INPUT1) switch

Select the method (Auto/Manual) for adjusting the volume level of the input audio from the INPUT1 jack.

8. AUDIO LEVEL (INPUT1) dial

Adjust the recording volume level of the input audio from the INPUT1 jack.

9. AUTO/MAN/LINK (INPUT2) switch

Select the method (Auto/Manual/Link to INPUT1) for adjusting the volume level of the input audio from the INPUT2
jack.

10. AUDIO LEVEL (INPUT2) dial

Adjust the recording volume level of the input audio from the INPUT2 jack.

49
11. LOW CUT (INPUT2) switch
Use this switch to minimize unwanted noise by attenuating low-frequency components of the input audio from the
INPUT2 jack.

12. AUDIO LEVEL (INPUT3) dial

Adjust the recording volume level of the input audio from the INPUT3 jack.

13. INPUT SELECT switch

Select the audio input for recording audio to the channels on the attached camera.

14. HANDLE AUDIO switch

Enable audio input from the XLR adaptor.

Ports and jacks

1. INPUT3 jack (stereo mini-jack, plug-in-power compatible)

2. Release lever
3. INPUT2 jack (3-pin XLR/TRS, female type, phantom-power compatible)
4. INPUT1 jack (3-pin XLR/TRS, female type, phantom-power compatible)
5. Micro USB port
Note
Do not touch the connectors with bare hands.

Related Topic
Attaching the supplied XLR handle unit
Recording audio using the XLR adaptor of the supplied handle

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

50
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Basic icons displayed on the monitor

This section describes the screen display when the shooting mode is (Flexible Exp. Mode) for movie shooting and
(Program Auto) for still image shooting.

The examples are of the display when the screen is in the all-information display mode.
The displayed content and positions are for reference only, and may differ from the actual display. Some icons may
not be displayed depending on the camera settings.

During movie recording

1. [Exposure Mode] is set to (Flexible Exp. Mode).

2. Audio level
3. [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
4. Time code
5. The camera is in the shooting standby mode.
6. [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [59.94p].
7. Slot number of the memory card recording the shooting data and recordable movie time
8. [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Tracking].
9. Remaining battery level
10. Shutter speed
11. Aperture value
12. Exposure compensation
13. ISO sensitivity
14. [ White Balance] is set to [Auto].
15. [ D-Range Optimizer] is set to [Off].
16. NFC is active.
17. [ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].

During still image shooting

51
 1. The shooting mode is set to (Program Auto).
2. Number of still images that can be recorded on the memory card in the currently displayed slot
3. Displayed when [AF Illuminator] is set to [Auto] and the camera detects that the AF Illuminator is required
4. [JPEG/HEIF Switch] is set to [JPEG]. [JPEG Quality] is set to [Fine].
5. [JPEG Image Size] is set to [12M].
6. [ SteadyShot] is set to [On].
7. [Drive Mode] is set to [Single Shooting].
8. [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide].
9. [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] is set to [On] and [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Human].
10. [ 1st Zoom Spd. ] under [ Zoom Lever Speed] is set to [3].
11. [ Picture Profile] is set to [PP11].

Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
List of icons on the playback screen

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

52
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Touch operations on the monitor

By touching the monitor, you can intuitively perform operations such as focusing on the shooting screen and operating
the playback screen.

Touch operations (on the shooting screen)

Touch the monitor to specify where to focus (Touch Focus).

Touch a subject on the monitor to use the touch tracking function (Touch Tracking).
For information on how to switch the function activated by touch operation, refer to “ Touch Func. in Shooting .”

Touch operations (on the playback screen)

During single-image playback, swipe the screen to the left or right to move to the previous or next image.

During single-image playback, you can enlarge or reduce the displayed image by moving apart or bringing together two
fingers on the screen (pinch-out/pinch-in).

You can also double-tap the monitor to enlarge a still image or exit the enlarged image.
During movie playback, you can start or pause playback using touch operations.

Hint
You can open the function menu by swiping upward quickly on the shooting screen.

53
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Sensitivity
Touch Func. in Shooting
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

54
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the control wheel

On the menu screen or the screen displayed by pressing the Fn button, you can move the selection frame by turning the
control wheel or by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Your selection is confirmed when you
press the center of the control wheel.

The DISP (Display Setting), SHUTTER (L.PressTv Auto/Manual), ZEBRA (Zebra Display Select), and PEAKING
(Peaking Display Select) functions are assigned to the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. In addition, you
can assign selected functions to the left/right/bottom side and the center of the control wheel, and to the rotation of
the control wheel.
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

55
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the multi-selector

You can move the focus area by pushing the multi-selector up/down/left/right. You can also assign a function to be
activated when you press the center of the multi-selector.

Put your finger right on top of the multi-selector to manipulate it more precisely.
You can move the focus area when [ Focus Area] is set to the following parameters:
[Zone]
[Spot: S] / [Spot: M] / [Spot: L]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot S] / [Tracking: Spot M] / [Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]

The [Focus Standard] function is assigned to the center of the multi-selector in the default settings.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Focus Standard

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

56
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the MODE (Mode) button

Use the MODE (Mode) button to select a shooting mode according to the subject and purpose of shooting.

Press the MODE button, use the control wheel to select the desired shooting mode, and then press the center of the
control wheel.

Shooting mode details

The shooting modes are divided into still image shooting modes, movie recording modes, and registration recall modes.

(A) Still image shooting modes

(B) Movie recording modes
(C) Registration recall modes

Hint
The menu items displayed vary depending on the shooting mode.

(A) Still image shooting modes

The shooting mode you select determines how to adjust the aperture (F value) and shutter speed.

Shooting
Icon Description
mode

Intelligent
(Intelligent The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
Auto
Auto)

Program Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed
Auto and the aperture value). You can set shooting functions such as [ ISO].

Aperture The aperture value is given priority and the shutter speed is adjusted automatically.
Priority Select this when you want to blur the background or focus on the entire screen.

57
 Shooting
Icon Description
mode

The shutter speed is given priority and the aperture value is adjusted automatically.
Shutter
Select this when you want to shoot a fast-moving subject without blurring, or when
Priority
you want to shoot a water or light trail.

Manual Manually adjust both the aperture value and shutter speed. You can shoot with your
Exposure favorite exposure.

(B) Movie recording modes

Icon Shooting mode Description

(Movie) Movie You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.

S&Q S&Q Motion You can set the exposure mode for S&Q Motion shooting.

The method for setting the exposure in the movie recording modes depends on the MENU → (Shooting) →
[Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Ctrl Type] setting.
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode]:
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Mode] or [ Exposure Mode] → Select the desired
exposure mode from among P/A/S/M.
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode]:
The aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity can be switched between the automatic setting and manual
setting by holding down the IRIS (Iris) button / SHUTTER (Shutter) button / ISO (ISO sensitivity) button. If you select the
manual setting, turn the front/rear dial or the control wheel and set the desired value.
In the manual setting mode, values can be locked by pressing the IRIS button / SHUTTER button / ISO button. You can
use this function to prevent the values from being unintentionally changed.

(C) Registration recall modes

Icon Shooting mode Description

You can call up frequently used modes and numerical value settings that have
MR1 / MR2 Recall Camera been registered* in advance then shoot the images.
* In [ Camera Set. Memory], you can register various shooting settings, such as the
/ MR3 Setting
exposure mode (P / A / S / M), aperture (F value), and shutter speed.

Related Topic
Intelligent Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Exposure Ctrl Type
Movie: Exposure Mode
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
Recall Camera Setting
Camera Set. Memory
Using the menu

58
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

59
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the menu

The menu screen is displayed by pressing the MENU button. You can change settings related to all of the camera
operations including shooting and playback, or you can execute a function from the menu screen.

(A) Menu tab

Menu tabs are categorized by usage scenario, such as shooting, playback, network settings, etc.

(B) Menu group

In each tab, menu items are grouped by function.
The number assigned to the group is the serial number in the tab. Refer to the number to determine the location of the
group in use.

(C) Menu item

Select the function you want to set or execute.

Hint
The name of the selected tab or group is displayed at the top of the screen.

When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], touch operations on the menu screen are possible.

Basic operations on the menu screen

1. Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
2. Move within the menu tree and find the desired menu item by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control
wheel.

The displayed menu items differ between the still image shooting modes and movie recording modes.

60
 (A) Menu tabs
(B) Menu groups
(C) Menu items
3. Press the center of the control wheel to select the menu item.
The setting screen or execution screen for the selected item will appear on the monitor.

4. Select a parameter or execute the function.

If you want to cancel changing the parameter, press the MENU button and go back to the previous screen.

5. Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.

You will return to the shooting screen or playback screen.

Hint
In the (Main) tab, you can view a list of the current shooting settings. Select a setting value in the tab to open the
corresponding menu item and change the setting value.

You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a custom key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.], and then pressing that key.

Relationship between the shooting mode and menu screen

The menu groups and menu items displayed in the [Main], [Shooting], [Exposure/Color], and [Focus] tabs vary
depending on the shooting mode.

Still image shooting modes (AUTO/P/A/S/M)

Menu items for shooting still images are displayed.*

* Since you can record movies with the REC (recording) button even in the still image shooting mode, some basic movie menu items are also
displayed.

Movie recording modes ( /S&Q)

Menu items for recording movies are displayed.

61
Icons used in the “Help Guide”
: Menu items displayed in the still image shooting modes (AUTO/P/A/S/M)
: Menu items displayed in the movie recording modes (Movie/S&Q)
: Menu items displayed in both the still image shooting modes and movie recording modes

Related Topic
Add Item
Display From My Menu
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Using the MODE (Mode) button

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

62
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the Main menu (shooting setting list)

Select the (Main) tab on the menu screen to display a list of shooting settings. You can confirm the settings before
shooting or for each scene, and also change the settings directly from this screen.

Main menu for shooting movies

Main1

1. Rec Frame Rate/ Rec Frame Rate (when shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies)

2. Tv Auto/Manual Switch/Shutter Speed (when shooting movies in the flexible exposure mode)

3. Av Auto/Manual Switch/Aperture (when shooting movies in the flexible exposure mode)

4. ISO Auto/Manual Set/ISO (when shooting movies in the flexible exposure mode)

5. White Balance

6. Picture Profile

7. File Format

8. Record Setting/ S&Q Settings (when shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies)

9. Gamma Display Assist

10. Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

11. Proxy Recording

12. Wind Noise Reduct.

13. Audio Rec Level

Main2

63
 1. Log Shooting Setting

2. Shooting

3. Format

4. Recording Media

5. File Settings

6. Exposure Mode

7. SteadyShot

8. Focus Mode

9. Focus Area

10. Face/Eye Prior. in AF

11. Face/Eye Subject

12. Remaining battery level

Main menu for shooting still images

Main1

1. Shutter Speed *

2. Aperture *

3. Exposure Comp.

4. ISO

64
 5. Format

6. Image Quality Settings

7. Aspect Ratio

8. Rec. Media Settings

9. Shoot Mode

10. Drive Mode

11. Flash Mode

12. Flash Comp.

13. Wireless Flash

14. White Balance

15. Focus Mode

16. Focus Area

17. Remaining battery level

* When the shooting mode is [Program Auto], the shutter speed and aperture value are displayed in the same area. You can perform Program
Shift by selecting the area.

Hint
If you assign the [Display Main Menu] function to the desired key using the custom key settings, you can also open the Main
menu by pressing the assigned key.

You can open the setting screens by touching the icons on the main menu when [Touch Operation] is set to [On].

Related Topic
Using the menu
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

65
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the function menu

If you press the Fn (function) button during shooting, a menu containing frequently used functions such as the audio
recording level and focus mode will appear on the screen (function menu). This allows you to access functions quickly.

Example of function menu

The displayed items differ depending on the camera status.

Hint
Use MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] →[Fn Menu Settings] to register your favorite functions in the function
menu. You can register 12 functions for shooting still images and 12 functions for shooting movies separately.

When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], touch operations on the menu screen are possible.

When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], you can also open [Fn Menu Settings] by holding down the icon in the function menu.

When [Swipe Up] is set to [Open the Fn Menu], the function menu can be displayed using touch operations by swiping the
shooting screen upward quickly.

Swipe downward from the area outside of the function menu or tap the area outside of the function menu to close the function
menu.

1 Press the Fn (Function) button.

2 Press the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel to select a function to set.

66
 3 Turn the front dial to select the desired setting, and press the center of the control wheel.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the icon for the desired function and then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for
the function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

Related Topic
Fn Menu Settings
Swipe Up

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

67
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the custom buttons

If you assign frequently used functions to the custom buttons (1-6) in advance, you can quickly call up those functions
simply by pressing the buttons during shooting or playback.
Recommended functions are assigned to the custom buttons by default.

To check/change the functions of the custom buttons

You can confirm the function currently assigned to each custom button via the following procedure.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key Setting].
If you want to change the function of the custom button, press the center of the control wheel while the custom button is
selected. The functions that can be assigned to that button will appear. Select your desired function.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

68
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the DISP (Display Setting) button

By pressing the DISP (Display Setting) button, you can change the content displayed on the screen during shooting and
playback. The display switches each time the DISP button is pressed.

During shooting
Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → Display All Info.
When shooting movies:

When shooting still images:

During playback
Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.

If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the corresponding section will blink on the histogram display
(overexposed/underexposed warning).

69
 The settings for playback are also applied in [ Auto Review].

Note
The displayed contents and their position shown in the illustration are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.

Related Topic
DISP (Screen Disp) Set

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

70
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the Delete button

You can delete an image currently being displayed by pressing the (Delete) button.

When a confirmation message appears after you press the (Delete) button, use the control wheel to select
[Delete] and press the center.
You can also delete two or more images at once.
Select MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete]. Then, select the images you want to delete.

Hint
If you set MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [ Delete pressing twice] to [On], you can delete images by pressing the
(Delete) button twice in a row.

Other than the single-image playback screen, you can also use the (Delete) button for the following operations.
Custom Key
In-Camera Guide

Related Topic
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete confirm.
Delete pressing twice
Using the custom buttons
In-Camera Guide

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

71
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the front dial and rear dial

You can use the front dial (A) or rear dial (B) to quickly change the setting values in the following cases:

When you want to adjust the aperture value or shutter speed.

When you want to change the camera settings during shooting.
During playback, you can turn the dials to browse images.

(A): Front dial

(B): Rear dial

Hint
You can use [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]/[ Custom Key/Dial Set.] to assign the desired functions to each dial.

You can also use the [My Dial Settings] function to assign your desired functions to the dials, and recall those functions when
required.

Related Topic
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Exposure Ctrl Type
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Av/Tv Rotate

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

72
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the keyboard

When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen. For examples of functions that use the
keyboard, see “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

1. Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
2. Switch character types
Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
3. Keyboard
Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed one-by-one in order. To
switch letters from lower to upper case, press (Up arrow).
4. (Left arrow)
Moves the cursor in the input box to the left.
5. (Right arrow)
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right. This key is also used to finalize the input of a character being edited
and move to the next character.
6. (Delete)
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
7. (Up arrow)
Switches a letter to upper or lower case.
8. (Space)
Enters a space.
9. OK
Press this key after entering characters to finalize the entered characters.

The procedure for entering alphabetic characters is explained below.

1 Use the control wheel to move the cursor to the desired key.

Each time you press the center of the control wheel, the characters will change
To switch the letter to upper or lower case, press (Up arrow).

2 When the character that you want to enter appears, press (Right arrow) to confirm the character.

Make sure to confirm one character at a time. Unless a character is confirmed, you cannot enter the next
character.
Even if you do not press (Right arrow), the entered character will be automatically confirmed after several
seconds.

3 After you finish entering all characters, press [OK] to finalize the entered characters.

73
 To cancel input, select [Cancel].

Related Topic
Copyright Info
Access Point Set.
Wired LAN (USB-LAN)
Edit Device Name
Security(IPsec)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

74
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

In-Camera Guide

The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.

1 Select the MENU or Fn item for which you want to see a description, and then press the (Delete) button
(A).

The descriptions of the item are displayed.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

75
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Charging the battery pack using a charger

1 Insert the battery pack into the battery charger.

Place the battery pack on the battery charger aligning the direction of (triangle) mark.
Slide the battery pack to the end.

2 Connect the power cord (supplied) to the battery charger, and connect the battery charger to the wall outlet
(wall socket).

When charging starts, the CHARGE lamp (A) lights up in orange.

You can check the approximate charging status with the charging status indicator lamp (B) as shown in the
following table. (The orange color indicates the lighting of the lamp.)
When the CHARGE lamp and charging status indicator lamp light up and then immediately turn off, the battery
pack is fully charged.
Charging status CHARGE lamp/Charging status indicator lamp

Immediately after attaching the battery pack - 30%

30% - 60%

60% - 90%

90% - Fully charged

Full charging completed

76
 The charge level shown by the charging status indicator lamp and the percentages in the above table are rough
guides.
The actual status may differ depending on the ambient temperature and the condition of the battery pack.

Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 150 min.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.

Note
Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using the AC Adaptor/Battery Charger. If any malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug
from the wall outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source.
If you use the product with a charge lamp, note that the product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp
turns off.

Before charging, be sure to also read “Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery.”

Related Topic
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Charging the battery with a commercially available AC adaptor or mobile battery
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

77
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Inserting/removing the battery pack

1 Slide the switch on the battery cover to open the cover.

2 Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until the battery locks into
place.

3 Close the cover and slide the switch to the LOCK side.

To remove the battery pack

Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera. Then, slide the lock lever (A) and remove the battery
pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack.

78
Related Topic
Charging the battery pack using a charger
Charging the battery with a commercially available AC adaptor or mobile battery
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

79
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Charging the battery with a commercially available AC adaptor or mobile battery

You can use a USB cable to charge from an external power source, such as a commercially available USB AC adaptor
or mobile battery.
When a device compatible with USB-PD (USB Power Delivery) is connected to the camera, fast charging is possible.

1 Turn off the camera, and connect an external power source to the USB Type-C terminal on the camera.

Charge lamp on the camera (orange)

Lit: Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not within the proper temperature
range

The charge lamp turns off when charging is completed.

If the charge lamp lights up and then immediately turns off, the battery pack is fully charged.

Note
USB charging is not possible from the Multi/Micro USB terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal to charge the battery pack.

If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do
not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended period of time.

Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer connected through a USB hub.

The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.

We recommend using a USB-PD device that is compatible with an output of 9V/3A or 9V/2A.

Before charging, be sure to also read “Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery.”

Related Topic
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery

80
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

81
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using the battery charger abroad

You can use the battery charger (supplied) in any country or region where the power supply is within 100 V to 240 V AC
and 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall outlet (wall socket).
Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.

Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

82
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Use an AC adaptor, etc. to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). This
conserves the camera's battery power.
We recommend using a USB-PD (USB Power Delivery) device that is compatible with an output of 9V/3A.

1 Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.

The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the
camera.

2 Connect the USB cable to the USB Type-C terminal on the camera.

3 Connect to a wall outlet (wall socket) using an AC adaptor, etc.

4 Turn on the camera.

An icon ( ) indicating that USB power is being supplied will appear on the monitor, and power supply will
start.

Note
USB power cannot be supplied from the Multi/Micro USB Terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal to supply power.

As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to the AC Adaptor, etc.

Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor, etc.

Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you remove the battery pack, the
camera will be turned off.

Only connect the USB cable to the camera or disconnect the USB cable from the camera while the camera is turned off.

Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened while power is supplied
from a wall outlet (wall socket). The area around the terminal may become hot. Be careful when handling it.

When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be careful of the remaining
power on the mobile charger during use.

Operation cannot be guaranteed with all external power supplies.

Related Topic
Inserting/removing the battery pack

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

83
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Inserting/removing a memory card

Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the camera. You can use CFexpress Type A memory cards
and SD memory cards with this camera.

1 Slide the switch on the memory card cover to open the cover.

2 Insert the memory card into the slot 1.

When using two memory cards, insert the second one into the slot 2.
Both Slot 1 and Slot 2 support CFexpress Type A memory cards and SD memory cards.
In the default settings, images are recorded on the memory card in Slot 1.
Insert a CFexpress Type A memory card with the label facing the monitor, and an SD memory card with the
terminal facing the monitor. Insert the card until it clicks into place.

3 Close the cover.

84
 Hint
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card on the camera for
more stable performance of the memory card.

You can change the memory card slot for recording by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media
Settings] → [ Recording Media] or [ Recording Media]. The Slot 1 is used in the default settings.

To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the
image type (still image/movie), select MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings], and then change
the settings of [ Recording Media] or [ Recording Media].

To remove the memory card

Open the memory card cover and make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit, then push in the memory card lightly
once to remove it.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card
Format
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

85
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Attaching/removing a lens

Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the lens.

1 Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the rear of the lens.

It is recommended that you attach the front lens cap when you have done shooting.

2 Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on the lens and camera.

Hold the camera with the lens mount facing down to prevent dust and debris from entering the camera.

3 While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks into the locked position.

86
 Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.

To remove the lens

Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
After removing the lens, attach the body cap to the camera and the lens caps to the front and rear of the lens to prevent
dust and debris from entering the camera and lens.

Lens hood
We recommend that you use the lens hood to prevent light outside the shooting frame from affecting the image. Attach
the lens hood so that the indexes on the lens and lens hood are aligned.
(There may be no lens hood index on some lenses.)

Note
When attaching/removing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location.

Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.

Do not use force when attaching a lens.

A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold separately). When using the Mount Adaptor, refer to
the operating manual supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

If you want to shoot full-frame images, use a full-frame size compatible lens.

When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of the lens to help balance the weight of the lens.

When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the lens firmly.

Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.

Attach the lens hood properly. Otherwise, the lens hood may not have any effect or may be partially reflected in the image.

Remove the lens hood when using the flash as the lens hood blocks the flash light and may appear as a shadow on the image.

Related Topic
Mount Adaptor

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

87
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Attaching the supplied XLR handle unit

By attaching the XLR handle unit, you can use the functions of the XLR adaptor.

1 Remove the shoe cap, and then attach the XLR handle unit to the Multi Interface Shoe.

2 Tightly fix the screws on either side by using a coin, etc.

To mount the accessory shoe

1. Remove four screws from the XLR handle unit.
2. Attach the accessory shoe so that its protrusions match the recesses in the accessory shoe mount, and then fix it to
the mount with the four screws.
Use the screws supplied with the accessory shoe kit.

88
 Attach the accessory shoe plate in the direction illustrated in accordance with the arrow mark on the plate. If you
attach it in the reverse direction with force, the plate may be damaged.

Note
Turn off the camera before attaching/removing the handle.

When attaching the handle to the camera, fasten the two handle-attachment screws securely. Using the handle without fastening
the handle-attachment screws may damage the Multi Interface Shoe terminal or cause the camera to fall off.

Related Topic
Recording audio using the XLR adaptor of the supplied handle

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

89
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Performing initial setup for the camera

By establishing a Bluetooth connection (pairing) between the camera and a smartphone and using the smartphone
application Creators’ App, you can perform initial camera settings such as date and time settings from the smartphone
(when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later). Install Creators’ App from your smartphone’s
application store. If the application is already installed, be sure to update it to the latest version.
You can also install Creators’ App by scanning the QR Code displayed on the screen of the camera using your
smartphone.
For details on Creators’ App, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/

1 Set the power switch to “ ” (On) to turn on the camera.

2 Select the desired language and then press the center of the control wheel.

The privacy notice screen will appear. Read the privacy notice regarding biometrics by opening the link using
your smartphone, etc.

3 Press the center of the control wheel.

4 Follow the instructions on the camera screen to connect the camera with your smartphone.

Launch Creators’ App on your smartphone to connect the camera with your smartphone.
If you do not connect a smartphone, the area/date/time setting screen will appear.
To connect your smartphone to the camera after the initial setup, select MENU → (Network) → [
Cnct./PC Remote] → [Smartphone Connection].

5 Perform initial camera setup on the Creators’ App screen.

Follow the instructions on the screen to set the following items.

Area/Date/Time
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Device name

You can change these settings later from the camera menu.

On maintaining the date and time

This camera has an internal rechargeable backup battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless
of whether the power is turned on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or discharged.
To charge the internal backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the camera, and leave the product for 24 hours
or more with the power turned off.
If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out.
Consult your service facility.

Hint

90
 By connecting the camera and a smartphone via the Bluetooth function, you can operate the camera using the smartphone and
transfer images from the camera to the smartphone.

Note
If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears every time you turn on the
camera.

The built-in clock of the camera may exhibit time errors. Adjust the time at regular intervals.

Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Area/Date/Time Setting
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Edit Device Name
WPS Push
Access Point Set.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

91
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Confirmation before shooting

This section introduces useful settings and functions that you should know when using the camera. We recommend that
you confirm these settings and functions before using the camera.
From each item name listed below, you can jump to the page explaining the respective functions.

Preparing a memory card for use with this camera

Format
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

Selecting a memory card for recording

Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media

Preventing accidental failure to insert a memory card

Release w/o Card

Selecting a memory card for playback

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Setting whether camera operating sounds are generated

Audio signals

Making it easy to check whether the camera is on standby or recording when set to a movie mode
Emphasized REC Display

Resetting shooting settings or resetting all camera settings

Setting Reset

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

92
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Shooting movies

You can set the recording format and exposure and record movies by using the dedicated menu items for movies.

1 Press the MODE (Mode) button, use the control wheel to select [Movie], and then press the center.

2 Press the REC (Recording) button to start recording.

3 Press the REC button again to stop recording.

To select the recording format ( File Format)

The resolution and degree of compatibility vary depending on the recording format (XAVC HS 4K/XAVC S 4K/XAVC S
HD/XAVC S-I 4K/XAVC S-I HD/XAVC S-I DCI 4K*). Select the format in accordance with the purpose of the movie to be
shot.
* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

93
To select the frame rate or image quality ( Movie Settings)
The frame rate determines the smoothness of motion in movies. ([ Movie Settings] → [Rec Frame Rate])
The image quality changes with the bit rate. ([ Movie Settings] → [Record Setting])
If the bit rate is high, the amount of information will increase and you can shoot high-quality movies. However, this will
result in a larger volume of data.
Select the frame rate and bit rate according to your preference and purpose.

To adjust the exposure (Exposure Ctrl Type/Exposure mode)

When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode], select the exposure mode using the shutter speed and aperture
value combination in the same way as when shooting a still image.
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], you can set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO
sensitivity automatically or manually.

To select the focusing method ( Focus Mode/ Focus Area)

Select (Continuous AF) or (Manual Focus) for [ Focus Mode]. You can specify the focus area by setting
[ Focus Area].

Even during shooting with manual focus, you can temporarily switch to auto focus in the following ways.

Press the custom key to which [AF On] is assigned, or press the shutter button halfway.
Press the custom key to which [Eye AF] is assigned.
Touch the subject on the monitor.

To record movie audio in 4 channels

Attach the XLR handle unit (supplied) or a genuine Sony accessory that supports 4-channel and 24-bit audio recording
to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.
Hint
You can also assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key.

You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button halfway down. (The sound of auto focus operation
may be recorded in some cases.)

You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while shooting movies.

The sounds of the camera and lens in operation may be recorded during movie shooting. To prevent sounds from being
recorded, set [Audio Recording] to [Off].

To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded when a power zoom lens is used, we recommend recording
movies using the zoom lever of the lens. When moving the zoom lever of the lens, be careful not to flip the lever.

Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.

You cannot start recording a movie while writing data. Wait until data writing is completed and “STBY” is displayed before
recording a movie.

If the (Overheating warning) icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the power off and cool the camera
and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.

The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This
is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn the power off and cool the
camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.

For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When movie recording is finished, you
can record another movie by pressing the REC button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the
temperature of the product or the battery.

94
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
Exposure Ctrl Type
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
Movie: Exposure Mode
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Shoe Audio Set.
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
REC w/ Shutter (movie)
Audio Recording
Recordable movie times

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

95
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)

This section describes how to shoot still images in the [Intelligent Auto] mode. In the [Intelligent Auto] mode, the camera
automatically focuses and automatically determines the exposure based on the shooting conditions.

1 Press the MODE (Mode) button, use the control wheel to select [Intelligent Auto], and press the center of
the control wheel.

The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).

2 Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera.

3 When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by using the zoom lever or the zoom ring.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

When the image is in focus, a beep sounds and the indicator ( , etc.) lights up.

5 Press the shutter button fully down.

To select the focus mode yourself ( Focus Mode / Focus Area)

Specifying a focus mode, such as selecting (Single-shot AF) for landscapes or still subjects and selecting
(Continuous AF) for moving subjects, makes it easier to focus on the desired subject. You can also specify the focus
position and range using [ Focus Area].

Shooting while focusing on human eyes

96
The [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] function under [Face/Eye AF] is enabled in the default settings, so you can use the Eye
AF function immediately.

To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)
When you focus on the subject, the focus is locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway down. Switch to the
desired composition and press the shutter button all the way down to take the picture.

You can lock the focus on non-moving subjects. Set [ Focus Mode] to (Single-shot AF).
Setting [ Focus Area] to [Center Fix] makes it easier to focus on subjects located in the center of the screen.

Hint
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep does not sound. Either recompose the
shot or change the focus mode or focus area settings. In [Continuous AF] mode, (focus indicator) lights up and the beep
indicating that the focus has been achieved does not sound.

Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed. Doing so will prevent images from being recorded normally.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Playing back still images
Auto Review (still image)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

97
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Finding functions from MENU

The displayed MENU items vary depending on the shooting mode. In the table below, the modes in which each MENU
item is displayed are indicated by the still image/movie/S&Q icons.

: The menu item is displayed when the shooting mode is set to the still image shooting modes (A).
: The menu item is displayed when the shooting mode is set to the movie recording modes (B).
: The menu item is displayed when the shooting mode is set to either the still image shooting modes (A) or the
movie recording modes (B).

When set to MR ( Recall Camera Setting), the registered shooting mode is used.

(Main) tab

Shooting settings are displayed in a list. For details, refer to “Using the Main menu (shooting setting list).”

(Shooting) tab

98
 Groups Menu items

JPEG/HEIF Switch

Image Quality Settings: File Format

Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type

Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality

Image Quality Settings: HEIF Quality

Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size

Image Quality Settings: HEIF Image Size

Aspect Ratio

File Format

Image Quality/Rec Movie Settings

S&Q Settings

Log Shooting Setting

Proxy Settings

Shooting

Long Exposure NR

High ISO NR

HLG Still Image

Color Space

Lens Compensation

Format

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Media

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Media

Media
Rec. Media Settings: Auto Switch Media

Recover Image DB

Display Media Info.

99
 Groups Menu items

File/Folder Settings

Select REC Folder

Create New Folder

File IPTC Information

Copyright Info

Write Serial Number

File Settings

Exposure Mode

Exposure Mode

Exposure Ctrl Type

Shooting Mode Recall Camera Setting

Camera Set. Memory

Memory/Recall Media

Reg. Custom Shoot Set

Drive Mode

Drive Mode Bracket Settings

Interval Shoot Func.

Silent Mode Settings

Shutter Type

e-Front Curtain Shut.

Shutter/Silent
Release w/o Lens

Release w/o Card

Anti-flicker Shoot.

Audio Recording

Audio Rec Level

Audio Recording Audio Out Timing

Wind Noise Reduct.

Shoe Audio Set.

100
 Groups Menu items

Time Code Preset

User Bit Preset

Time Code Format

TC/UB
Time Code Run

Time Code Make

User Bit Time Rec

SteadyShot

SteadyShot
Image Stabilization
SteadyShot Adjust.

Focal Length

Zoom Range

Zoom Lever Speed

Zoom
Custom Key Z. Speed

Remote Zoom Speed

Grid Line Display

Grid Line Type

Shooting Display
Live View Display Set.

Emphasized REC Display

Marker Display

Center Marker

Marker Display Aspect Marker

Safety Zone

Guideframe

(Exposure/Color) tab

101
 Groups Menu items

Auto Slow Shutter

ISO

ISO Range Limit

Exposure ISO AUTO Min. SS

Base ISO

Exposure Index

Auto/Manual Swt. Set.

Exposure Comp.

Exposure Comp. Exposure step

Exposure Std. Adjust

Metering Mode

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Metering
Spot Metering Point

AEL w/ Shutter

Flash Mode

Flash Comp.

Exp.comp.set
Flash
Wireless Flash

Red Eye Reduction

External Flash Set.

White Balance

Priority Set in AWB

White Balance
Shutter AWB Lock

Shockless WB

D-Range Optimizer

Creative Look

Color/Tone Picture Profile

Select LUT

Manage User LUTs

Zebra Display
Zebra Display
Zebra Level

102
 (Focus) tab

Groups Menu items

Focus Mode

Priority Set in AF-S

Priority Set in AF-C

AF Tracking Sensitivity

AF Illuminator

AF/MF Aperture Drive in AF

AF w/ Shutter

Pre-AF

AF Transition Speed

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity

AF Assist

Focus Area

Focus Area Limit

Switch V/H AF Area

Focus Area Color

AF Area Registration

Focus Area Del. Regist. AF Area

AF Area Auto Clear

AF-C Area Display

Phase Detect. Area

Circ. of Focus Point

AF Frame Move Amt

Face/Eye Prior. in AF

Face/Eye Subject

Right/Left Eye Select

Face/Eye AF
Face/Eye Frame Disp.

Face Memory

Regist. Faces Priority

103
 Groups Menu items

Auto Magnifier in MF

Focus Magnifier

Focus Magnif. Time

Focus Assistant
Initial Focus Mag.

AF in Focus Mag.

Initial Focus Mag.

Peaking Display

Peaking Display Peaking Level

Peaking Color

(Playback) tab

Groups Menu items

Select Playback Media

Playback Target
View Mode

Enlarge Image

Magnification Enlarge Initial Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position

Protect

Selection/Memo Rating

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Delete

Delete Delete pressing twice

Delete confirm.

Rotate

Copy
Edit
Photo Capture

JPEG/HEIF Switch

Cont. Play for Interval

Viewing Play Speed for Interval

Slide Show

104
 Groups Menu items

Image Index

Display as Group

Display Rotation
Playback Option
Focus Frame Display

Disp Specified Time Img.

Image Jump Setting

(Network) tab

Groups Menu items

Smartphone Connection

PC Remote Function

Select on Cam & Send

Cnct./PC Remote
Reset Transfer Status

Cnct. while Power OFF

Remote Shoot Setting

FTP Transfer FTP Transfer Func.

Wi-Fi Connect

WPS Push

Access Point Set.

Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Frequency Band *

Display Wi-Fi Info.

SSID/PW Reset

Bluetooth Function

Pairing

Bluetooth Manage Paired Device

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

Disp Device Address

IP Address Setting
Wired LAN
Display Wired LAN Info.

105
 Groups Menu items

USB-LAN Connection

USB-LAN Disconnection
USB-LAN/Tethering
Tethering Connection

Tethering Disconnection

Airplane Mode

Edit Device Name

Import Root Certificate

Network Option Access Authen. Settings

Access Authen. Info

Security(IPsec)

Reset Network Set.

* For some models only

(Setup) tab

Groups Menu items

Language

Area/Date Area/Date/Time Setting

NTSC/PAL Selector

Setting Reset
Reset/Save Settings
Save/Load Settings

Custom Key/Dial Set.

Custom Key/Dial Set.

Custom Key Setting

Fn Menu Settings
Operation Customize
Different Set for Still/Mv

DISP (Screen Disp) Set

REC w/ Shutter

Zoom Ring Rotate

106
 Groups Menu items

Custom Key/Dial Set.

Custom Key/Dial Set.

My Dial Settings
Dial Customize
Av/Tv Rotate

Function Ring(Lens)

Lock Operation Parts

Touch Operation

Touch Sensitivity
Touch Operation
Swipe Up

Touch Func. in Shooting

Monitor Brightness

Monitor Display Quality

Monitor Flip Direction

TC/UB Disp. Setting

Gamma Display Assist

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

Display LUT
Display Option
De-Squeeze Display

Remain Shoot Display

Auto Review

Display File Name

Power Save Start Time

Power Setting Option
Auto Power OFF Temp.

Volume Settings

Sound Option 4ch Audio Monitoring

Audio signals

USB Connection Mode

USB USB LUN Setting

USB Power Supply

107
 Groups Menu items

HDMI Resolution

HDMI Output Settings

External Output
HDMI Info. Display

CTRL FOR HDMI

Video Light Mode

REC Lamp

Fan Control

IR Remote Ctrl

Setup Option Sensor Cleaning

Auto Pixel Mapping

Pixel Mapping

Version

Display Serial Number

(My Menu) tab

Groups Menu items

Add Item

Sort Item

Delete Item
My Menu Setting
Delete Page

Delete All

Display From My Menu

Note
The order in which the menu tabs are listed here differs from the actual display.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

108
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Contents of this chapter

The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Using the shooting functions”). From each
item name, you can jump to the page describing the respective functions.

Selecting a shooting mode

Exposure Ctrl Type
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
Movie: Exposure Mode
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
Intelligent Auto
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
Bulb shooting
Auto Slow Shutter

Focusing
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)

Face/Eye AF
Focusing on human eyes
Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)
Face/Eye Subject (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Face/Eye Frame Disp. (still image/movie)
Face Memory
Regist. Faces Priority (still image/movie)

Using focusing functions

Focus Standard
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)
Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)
AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)
Focus Area Color (still image/movie)
AF Area Auto Clear
AF-C Area Display
Phase Detect. Area
AF Tracking Sensitivity
AF Transition Speed
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity
AF Assist
109
 AF/MF Selector
AF w/ Shutter
AF On
Focus Hold
Pre-AF
Priority Set in AF-S
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Illuminator
Aperture Drive in AF
AF in Focus Mag.
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Peaking Display
Adjusting the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)
Histogram display
Exposure step (still image/movie)
Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)
D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
AE lock
AEL w/ Shutter
Zebra Display

Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO (still image/movie)
ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)
ISO AUTO Min. SS

White balance
White Balance (still image/movie)
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)
Shutter AWB Lock
Shockless WB

Log shooting settings

Log shooting
Log Shooting Setting
Select LUT
Manage User LUTs
Base ISO
Exposure Index
Display LUT

Adding effects to images

Creative Look (still image/movie)
Picture Profile (still image/movie)

Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)

Drive Mode
110
 Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Indicator during bracket shooting
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
Interval Shoot Func.

Setting the image quality and recording format

JPEG/HEIF Switch
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Aspect Ratio
HLG Still Image
Color Space
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
S&Q Settings
Proxy Settings
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)
Angle of view

Using touch functions

Touch Operation
Touch Sensitivity
Swipe Up
Touch Func. in Shooting
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)

Shutter settings
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
Shutter Type
e-Front Curtain Shut.
Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)
Release w/o Card
Anti-flicker Shoot.

Using the zoom

The zoom features available with this product
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)
Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)
Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)
About zoom scale
Zoom Ring Rotate

Using the flash

Using flash (sold separately)
Flash Mode
111
 Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
FEL lock
External Flash Set.
Reducing blur
SteadyShot (still image)
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)

Lens Compensation (still image/movie)

Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR

Setting the monitor display during shooting

Auto Review (still image)
Remain Shoot Display (still image)
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Live View Display Set.
Aperture Preview
Shot. Result Preview
Bright Monitoring
Emphasized REC Display
Marker Display
Gamma Display Assist
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

Recording movie audio

Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Shoe Audio Set.
Recording audio using the XLR adaptor of the supplied handle

TC/UB settings
TC/UB
TC/UB Disp. Setting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

112
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Exposure Ctrl Type

You can select the method for setting the exposure (shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity) when shooting movies.
[Flexible Exp. Mode] allows you to individually switch between the automatic and manual settings for aperture value,
shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity.
[P/A/S/M Mode] allows you to select from the P/A/S/M modes in the same manner as the exposure mode for still images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Ctrl Type] → desired setting.

Menu item details

P/A/S/M Mode:
Select the desired exposure mode from among [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter Priority], and [Manual
Exposure].
Flexible Exp. Mode:
Sets the aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity automatically (Auto) or manually (Manual).
You can switch between the automatic and manual settings using the assigned custom key, or change the aperture,
shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity values by turning the front/rear dials and the control wheel.

Note
Even if [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], when shooting a movie by pressing the REC (recording) button in a
still image shooting mode, the movie will be shot in the exposure mode for still image shooting.

Related Topic
Movie: Exposure Mode
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

113
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Auto/Manual Swt. Set.

When shooting movies, you can switch between the automatic and manual settings separately for aperture, shutter
speed, and ISO sensitivity as you would with the exposure control system of a professional camera. Set [Exposure Ctrl
Type] to [Flexible Exp. Mode] beforehand.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Auto/Manual Swt. Set.] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Av Auto/Manual Switch:
Switches the aperture value between [Auto] and [Manual].
Tv Auto/Manual Switch:
Switches the shutter speed between [Auto] and [Manual].
ISO Auto/Manual Set:
Switches the ISO sensitivity between [Auto] and [Manual].

To switch between [Auto] and [Manual] using a custom keys

When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], the following functions are assigned to the custom keys during
movie recording.

[Av Auto/Manual Switch]: IRIS (Iris) button

[Tv Auto/Manual Switch]: SHUTTER (Shutter) button on the control wheel
[ISO Auto/Manual Set]: ISO (ISO sensitivity) button

Each time you press and hold down the respective custom key, the aperture value, shutter speed, or ISO sensitivity
switches between [Auto] and [Manual].
When [Manual] is selected, values can be locked by pressing the respective key. You can use this function to prevent the
values from being unintentionally changed.
When [Auto] is selected, the proper exposure is set automatically, and when [Manual] is selected, the aperture value,
shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity can be set with the following dials.
Aperture value: front dial
Shutter speed: control wheel
ISO sensitivity: rear dial

Note
When you set the aperture value with the lens aperture ring, the aperture ring value takes priority over the dial value.

Related Topic
Exposure Ctrl Type

114
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

115
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Movie: Exposure Mode

You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting. The setting you have selected will be applied when [Exposure Ctrl
Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode].

1 MODE (Mode) button → [Movie] → press the center of the control wheel.

2 MENU→ (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

3 Press the REC (recording) button to start recording.

Press the REC button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

Related Topic
Exposure Ctrl Type

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

116
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. The setting you have selected will be applied
when [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode].
You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with [ S&Q Settings].

1 MODE (Mode) button → [S&Q Motion] → press the center of the control wheel.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

3 Press the REC (recording) button to start recording.

Press the REC button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

Related Topic
S&Q Settings
Exposure Ctrl Type

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

117
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Intelligent Auto

The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.

1 MODE (Mode) button → [Intelligent Auto] → press the center of the control wheel.

2 Point the camera at the subject.

When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the screen.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

About Scene Recognition

The Scene Recognition function allows the camera to automatically recognize shooting conditions.
When the camera recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed at the top of the screen:
The scene recognition mark for movie shooting is displayed when shooting a movie using the REC (recording) button in
the [Intelligent Auto] mode for still image shooting.

(Portrait)
(Infant)
(Night Portrait)
(Night Scene)
(Backlight Portrait)
(Backlight)
(Landscape)
(Macro)
(Spotlight)
(Low Light)
(Night Scene using a tripod)
(Tripod)*

* Only an icon is displayed.

Note
The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom functions other than optical zoom.

The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.

For [Intelligent Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.

118
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

119
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Program Auto

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

You can set shooting functions such as [ ISO].

1 MODE (Mode) button → [Program Auto] → press the center of the control wheel.

2 Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

Program Shift (only during still image shooting)

When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing
the appropriate exposure set by the camera.
Turn the front/rear dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination.

“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the front/rear dial.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off the camera.

Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.

Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting you made.

When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

120
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Aperture Priority

You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.

1 MODE (Mode) button → use the control wheel to select [Aperture Priority] → press the center of the control
wheel.

2 Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.

Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting
screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

Note
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic
Aperture Preview

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

121
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Shutter Priority

You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter speed, for example, at the
instant of the movement with high speed shutter, or as a trailing image with low speed shutter.

1 MODE (Mode) button → [Shutter Priority] → press the center of the control wheel.

2 Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.

If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks. If this
happens, change the shutter speed.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

Hint
Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter speed.

When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

Note
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in [Shutter Priority] mode.

When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer with a [Shutter Type] other than
[Electronic Shutter] is set, noise reduction after shooting is performed for the same amount of time that the shutter was open.
However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic
Long Exposure NR
ISO (still image/movie)
Bulb shooting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

122
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Manual Exposure

You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.

1 MODE (Mode) button → [Manual Exposure] → press the center of the control wheel.

2 Select the desired aperture value by turning the front dial.

Select the desired shutter speed by turning the rear dial.

You can set which dial changes the aperture value and shutter speed with [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.].
You can also set [ ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value automatically changes to
achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
When [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the value you have set is not suitable
for appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.
When [ ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use “M.M.” (Metered Manual)* to check the exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the camera.
* Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

Hint
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the set exposure value by pressing the
key to which you assigned [AEL hold] or [AEL toggle] using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], and rotating
the front dial or rear dial. (Manual shift)

Note
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.

The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic
ISO (still image/movie)
Bulb shooting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

123
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Bulb shooting

You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.
Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails from stars or fireworks, etc.

1 MODE (Mode) button → [Manual Exposure] → press the center of the control wheel.

2 Turn the rear dial clockwise until [BULB] is indicated.

3 Select the aperture value (F-value) using the front dial.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

5 Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.

As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.

Hint
When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode. If you use a lens whose infinity point is unclear, adjust the
focus on the fireworks in the area you want to focus on in advance.

In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to deteriorate, we recommend that you start shooting while
the camera is cool.

During bulb shooting, images tend to blur. It is recommended that you use a tripod, a Bluetooth remote commander (sold
separately) or a remote commander equipped with a lock function (sold separately). When using the Bluetooth remote
commander, you can start bulb shooting by pressing the shutter button on the remote commander. To stop bulb shooting, press
the shutter button on the remote commander again. To use the other remote commander, use the model which can be connected
via the Multi/Micro USB terminal.

Note
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.

When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On], noise reduction is performed after shooting for the same duration that the shutter was
open. You cannot shoot while noise reduction is in progress.

You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
When the drive mode is set to the following:

[Cont. Shooting]
[Self-timer(Cont)]
[Cont. Bracket]

[Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed is temporarily set to 30 seconds.

Related Topic
124
Manual Exposure
Long Exposure NR

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

125
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Auto Slow Shutter

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark. This function
cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Note
[Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [ ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode] and the method for adjusting the shutter speed is set to [Manual]
When [Log Shooting] under [Log Shooting Setting] is set to [Cine EI Quick] or [Cine EI]

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

126
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)

Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Single-shot AF:
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.

Automatic AF:
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with [Continuous AF]
from the second shot.

Continuous AF:
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.

DMF:
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using [Manual Focus] from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

Manual Focus:
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use [Manual Focus].

Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.

Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
127
 Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]
function.

When you set the focus to infinity in [Manual Focus] mode or [DMF] mode, make sure that the focus is on a sufficiently distant
subject by checking the monitor.

Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.

When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing. This does not affect
the actual recorded images.

Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available in the movie shooting mode.

Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Manual Focus
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

128
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

Set the type of focusing frame when shooting with the auto focus. Select the mode according to the subject.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Wide:
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.

Zone:
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.

Center Fix:
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.

Spot: S/Spot: M/Spot: L:

Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.

Expand Spot:
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the [Spot] as a secondary priority area
for focusing.

Tracking:
This setting is available only when the [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF]. When the shutter button is pressed
and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor at [Tracking]
on the [ Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the
control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a [Tracking:
Zone], [Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L] or [Tracking: Expand Spot].

Note
[ Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]

The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.

When the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion] or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected for [ Focus
Area].

129
Examples of the focusing frame display
The focusing frame differs as follows.

When focusing on a larger area

When focusing on a smaller area

When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger
area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA3 or LA-EA5) (sold separately), the focusing frame
for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.

When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [ Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing
frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.

To move the focus area

You can move the focus area by operating the multi-selector when [ Focus Area] is set to the following
parameters:
[Zone]
[Spot: S]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: L]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]

130
 If you assign [Focus Standard] to the center of the multi-selector beforehand, you can move the focusing frame back
to the center of the monitor by pressing the center of the multi-selector.

Hint
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot] or [Expand Spot], you can move the focusing frame over a greater distance at a time with
the multi-selector by setting [ AF Frame Move Amt] to [Large].

You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On], and set
[Touch Func. in Shooting] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.

To track the subject temporarily when shooting still images (Tracking On)
You can temporarily change the setting for [ Focus Area] to [Tracking] while you press and hold down the custom key
to which you have assigned [Tracking On] in advance. The [ Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On]
will switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:

[ Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking On] [ Focus Area] while [Tracking On] is active

[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]

[Spot: S] [Tracking: Spot S]

[Expand Spot] [Tracking: Expand Spot]

Phase detection AF
When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the
phase detection AF and contrast AF.

Note
Phase detection AF is available only when a compatible lens is attached. If you use a lens that does not support phase detection
AF, you cannot use the following functions.

[Automatic AF]
[AF Tracking Sensitivity]
[AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity]
[AF Transition Speed]

Also, even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase detection AF might not function unless you update the
lens.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Touch Operation
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

131
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and keeps marking it with the focusing frame.
You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or by specifying by touch operation. The required
function varies depending on the setting method.

You can refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

Setting the start position to track by focusing area ([Tracking] under [ Focus Area])
The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the tracking starts by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.

This function is available in still image shooting mode.

This function is available when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

Setting the start position to track by touch operation ([Touch Tracking] under [Touch Func. in
Shooting])
You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor.

This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
This function is available when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF], [Continuous AF], or
[DMF].

Changing the setting for [ Focus Area] to [Tracking] temporarily ([Tracking On] by Custom Key)
Even [ Focus Area] is set to other than [Tracking], you can temporarily change the setting for [ Focus Area] to
[Tracking] while pressing and holding the key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] function.

Assign the [Tracking On] function to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.
This function is available when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

132
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Manual Focus

When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → [Manual Focus].

2 Rotate the focusing ring to achieve sharp focus.

When you shoot a still image, you can display the focus distance on the screen by rotating the focusing ring.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.

Note
The displayed focus distance is just a reference.

Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Peaking Display

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

133
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Direct manual focus (DMF)

You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → [DMF].

2 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.

3 Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the focusing ring to achieve a sharper
focus.

When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.

4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Peaking Display

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

134
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focusing on human eyes

The camera can automatically detect faces and eyes and focus on the eyes (Eye AF). The following explanation is for
cases where the detection target is human. The faces of up to 8 subjects can be detected.
There are two methods for performing [Eye AF], with some differences between their specifications. Select the
appropriate method according to your purpose.

Item [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] function [Eye AF] via a custom key

The camera will detect faces/eyes with greater The camera will detect faces/eyes
Characteristics
priority. exclusively.

Select [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] → [On]. Assign [Eye AF] to the desired key using [
Advance
Select [ Face/Eye Subject] → [Human]. Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom
preparation
Key/Dial Set.].

How to perform Press the key to which you have assigned the
Press the shutter button halfway down.*1
[Eye AF] [Eye AF] function.*2

When the camera detects a face or eye

The camera focuses exclusively on faces
inside or around the designated focus area,
or eyes anywhere on the screen,
it focuses on the face or eye with greater
regardless of the setting for [ Focus
priority.
Area].
Function details If the camera does not detect any faces or
The camera will not automatically focus
eyes inside or around the designated focus
on another subject if no face or eye is
area, it will focus on another detectable
detected anywhere on the screen.
subject.

Follows the setting designated with [ Focus Follows the setting designated with [
Focus mode
Mode] Focus Mode]

The focus area temporarily becomes the

Follows the setting designated with [ Focus
Focus area entire screen, regardless of the setting for [
Area]
Focus Area].

*1 This is the operation for performing [Eye AF] when shooting still images. When shooting movies, [Eye AF] is activated without pressing the
shutter button as long as faces or eyes are detected.
*2 Regardless of whether [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] is set to [On] or [Off], you can use [Eye AF] via a custom key while you are pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned [Eye AF].

[Eye AF] by custom key

The Eye AF function can be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as you
are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen
regardless of the setting for [ Focus Area].
The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] →
desired key, then assign the [Eye AF] function to the key.

135
2. MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Face/Eye Subject] → [Human].
3. Point the camera at the face of a human, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF] function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.
To focus on the eyes of an animal
Set [ Face/Eye Subject] to [Animal] before shooting. If the detection target is an animal, eyes can be detected only
when shooting still images. Animal faces are not detected.

Hint
Setting [ Face/Eye Frame Disp.] to [On] makes it easier to check the detection status of faces or eyes.

Note
The [Eye AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much

There are also other situations in which it may not be possible to focus on the eyes.

When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes
when no human faces are detected.

The camera may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.

Related Topic
Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)
Face/Eye Subject (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Face/Eye Frame Disp. (still image/movie)
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

136
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)

Sets whether or not the camera detects faces or eyes inside the focus area while performing autofocus, and then
focuses on the eyes automatically (Eye AF).

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Focuses on the faces or eyes with priority if there are faces or eyes inside or around the designated focus area.
Off:
Does not prioritize faces or eyes when performing auto-focusing.

Hint
By combining the [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] function with [ Focus Area] → [Tracking], you can maintain focus on a moving
eye or face.

When [Face/Eye Priority Select] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.],
you can switch the [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] function on or off by pressing the key.

Note
If the camera does not detect any faces or eyes inside or around the designated focus area, it will focus on another detectable
subject.

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] is locked to [On].

Related Topic
Focusing on human eyes
Face/Eye Subject (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

137
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Face/Eye Subject (still image/movie)

Selects the target to be detected with the Face/Eye AF function.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Face/Eye Subject] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Human:
Detects human faces/eyes.
Animal:
Detects animal eyes.

Hint
To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once
you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.

Note
When [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Regist. Faces Priority

Even when [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.

Related Topic
Focusing on human eyes
Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

138
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)

Sets whether to focus on the left eye or right eye when [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Human] or [Animal].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Right/Left Eye Select] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The camera automatically detects either the left eye or right eye.
Right Eye:
The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Left Eye:
The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.

[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

You can also switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key.
When [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch the eye to be detected by pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye detection.

Pressing the center of the control wheel

Pressing the center of the multi-selector
Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF] is assigned (only during still image shooting)
Pressing the MENU button

Hint
When [ Face/Eye Frame Disp.] is set to [On], the eye detection frame appears around the eye you selected using [
Right/Left Eye Select] or [Switch Right/Left Eye] with the custom key.

Related Topic
Focusing on human eyes
Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)
Face/Eye Subject (still image/movie)
Face/Eye Frame Disp. (still image/movie)
Face Memory

139
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

140
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Face/Eye Frame Disp. (still image/movie)

Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a face or eyes are detected.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Face/Eye Frame Disp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays a detection frame when a face or eyes are detected.
Off:
Does not display a detection frame when a face or eyes are detected.

Face detection frame

When the camera detects a face, the gray face-detection frame appears. The frame color will be reddish purple if the
detected face has been registered using the [Face Memory] function.
The face detection frame turns white when the face is detected inside or around the focus area, and the camera
determines that autofocus is enabled.

Eye detection frame

A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible.
The eye detection frame is displayed as follows when [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Animal].

Hint

141
 If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face
or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].

Note
If the subject or the camera is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over the subject.

The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.

Even if [ Face/Eye Frame Disp.] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will appear over faces or eyes that are in focus when
you press the shutter button halfway down, etc.

Related Topic
Focusing on human eyes
Face/Eye Prior. in AF (still image/movie)
Face/Eye Subject (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Face Memory

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

142
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Face Memory

Sets personal face data. If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.
Up to eight faces can be registered.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [Face Memory] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

New Registration:
Shoots and registers faces.
Order Exchanging:
When multiple faces are registered, the order of priority for the registered face data can be changed.
Delete:
Deletes registered faces one by one.
Delete All:
Deletes all registered faces at once.

Note
When performing [New Registration], shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly
if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from
the product, select [Delete All].

Related Topic
Regist. Faces Priority (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

143
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Regist. Faces Priority (still image/movie)

Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Memory].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Face/Eye AF] → [ Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Memory].
Off:
Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.

Hint
To use the [ Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.
[ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] under [Face/Eye AF]: [On]
[ Face/Eye Subject] under [Face/Eye AF]: [Human]

Related Topic
Face Memory

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

144
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focus Standard

If you press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned, you can recall useful functions such as automatically
focusing on a subject in the center of the screen in accordance with the focus area settings.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign the [Focus Standard] function to the key.

2 Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.

What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the setting for [ Focus Area].

Examples of [Focus Standard] key functions

When [ Focus Area] is set to any of the following parameters, pressing the key moves the focusing frame back to
the center:
[Zone]
[Spot: S]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: L]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]

When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide], [Center Fix], [Tracking: Wide], or [Tracking: Center Fix], pressing the key in
the autofocus mode makes the camera focus on the center of the screen. If you press the key while recording a
movie with manual focus, you can temporarily switch to autofocus and focus on the center of the screen.

Note
You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

145
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)

You can set whether to switch the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of
the camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera
position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not switch the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
AF Point Only:
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [
Focus Area] is fixed.
AF Point + AF Area:
Switches both the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).

An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected

(A) Vertical: [Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Spot] (Upper right corner)
(C) Vertical: [Zone] (Lower left corner)

Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical
with the side of the shutter button facing down.

Note
If the setting for [Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.

The [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point +
AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto]
During movie shooting
While using the digital zoom function
While the auto-focusing is activated
During continuous shooting
During the countdown for the self-timer

146
 When [Focus Magnifier] is activated

When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal
focus setting or with the last focus setting.

The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

147
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when
shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you
can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

How to register focus area

1. MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF Area Registration] → [On].
2. Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.

How to call up the registered focus area

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → desired key, then select [Regist.
AF Area hold].
2. Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and then
press the shutter button to shoot images.
Hint
When a focusing frame is registered using [AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.

If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.

If [Reg. AF Area+AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the registered focusing frame is performed when the
key is pressed.

Note
A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
While [Touch Focus] is being performed
While using the digital zoom function
While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
While focusing
While performing focus lock

You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or [Down Button].

You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Movie], or [S&Q Motion]

When [AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Lock Operation Parts] setting is locked to [Off].

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

148
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

149
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [AF Area Registration].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Del. Regist. AF Area].

Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

150
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)

By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [ Focus
Area].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas
that you want to use, and then select [OK].

The types of focus areas marked with (check mark) will be available as settings.

Hint
When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], the focus
area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas with [ Focus Area Limit] in
advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.

Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [ Focus Area Limit].

If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [Switch V/H AF Area] or [AF Area Registration], the registered
settings will change.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

151
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)

Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame. This
function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the other quickly.
The function can be used when the following settings are selected for [ Focus Area].

[Zone]
[Spot: S]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: L]
[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.

When [Circulate] is selected:

Menu item details

Does Not Circulate:
The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Circulate:
The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

Note
Even if you set [ Circ. of Focus Point] to [Circulate], the focusing frame will not circulate diagonally.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

152
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)

Sets the distance by which the focusing frame is moved when [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot], etc. You can quickly
move the focusing frame by increasing the distance, such as in situations where the subject is moving a lot.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ AF Frame Move Amt] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
The focusing frame moves by the standard distance.
Large:
The focusing frame moves over a greater distance at a time than with [Standard].

Hint
When [Swt. AF Frame Move hold] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.],
the [ AF Frame Move Amt] setting temporarily switches while the key is pressed.

If any of the following functions is assigned to the dials or control wheel using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial
Set.], you can move the focusing frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [ AF Frame
Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
[Move AF Frame : Std]

If any of the following functions is assigned to the dials or control wheel using [My Dial Settings], you can move the focusing
frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [ AF Frame Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
[Move AF Frame : Std]

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

153
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focus Area Color (still image/movie)

You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area Color] → desired color.

Menu item details

White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

154
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF Area Auto Clear

Sets whether the focus area is displayed all the time or disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

155
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF-C Area Display

You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] and [
Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF-C Area Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.

Note
When [ Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center Fix]
[Spot]
[Expand Spot]

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

156
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Phase Detect. Area

Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Phase Detect. Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the Phase Detection AF area.
Off:
Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.

Note
Phase Detection AF is available only with compatible lenses. If an incompatible lens is attached, you will be unable to use Phase
Detection AF. Phase Detection AF may not operate even with some compatible lens, such as lenses purchased in the past that
have not been updated.

When shooting images using a full-frame-size-compatible lens, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed even if [Phase
Detect. Area] is set to [On].

When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

157
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF Tracking Sensitivity

You can select the AF track sensitivity when the subject goes out of focus in still image mode.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Tracking Sensitivity] → desired setting.

Menu item details

5(Responsive)/4/3(Standard)/2/1(Locked on):
Select [5(Responsive)] to focus responsively on subjects at different distances.
Select [1(Locked on)] to keep the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

158
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF Transition Speed

Sets the focusing speed when the target of the auto focus is switched during movie shooting.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Transition Speed] → desired setting.

Menu item details

7 (Fast)/6/5/4/3/2/1 (Slow):
Select a faster value to focus on the subject more quickly.
Select a slower value to focus on the subject more smoothly.

Hint
You can use the touch focus function to intentionally transition the AF.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

159
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity with which the focus switches to another subject when the original subject leaves the focus area or
an unfocused subject in the foreground approaches the center of the focus area during movie shooting.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity] → desired setting.

Menu item details

5(Responsive)/4/3/2/1(Locked on):
Select a higher value when you want to shoot a quick-moving subject, or when you want to shoot multiple subjects while
switching the focus continually.
Select a lower value when you want the focus to remain steady, or when you want to keep the focus on a particular
target without being affected by other subjects.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

160
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF Assist

While shooting a movie with auto focus, you can change the subject in focus by operating the focus ring of the lens.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Assist] → [On].

2 While shooting a movie with auto focus, turn the focus ring of the lens to focus on the intended subject.

When you stop operating the focus ring, the subject that is in focus with the focus ring becomes the autofocus
target.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the AF assist function.
Off:
Does not use the AF assist function.

Note
Only subjects within the focus area are targeted by auto focus.

The following lenses are not compatible with [AF Assist].

SELP1650 (sold separately)
SEL18200LE (sold separately)

Related Topic
Peaking Display

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

161
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF/MF Selector

You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting without changing your
holding position.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired button → [AF/MF Selector Hold] or [AF/MF Selector Toggle].

Menu item details

AF/MF Selector Hold:
Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.
AF/MF Selector Toggle:
Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.

Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Selector Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.

If the lens is equipped with an AF/MF selector switch, the state of the switch on the lens will take priority.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

162
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF w/ Shutter

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus
and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF w/ Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.

Related Topic
AF On

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

163
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF On

You can focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down. The settings for [ Focus Mode] will be applied.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign the [AF On] function to the key.

2 Press the key to which you have assigned the [AF On] function.

When shooting a movie, you can perform auto-focusing by holding down the custom key to which [AF On] is
assigned even in the manual focusing mode.

Hint
Set [AF w/ Shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto focusing using the shutter button.

Set [AF w/ Shutter] and [Pre-AF] to [Off] to focus at a specific shooting distance predicting the position of the subject.

Related Topic
AF w/ Shutter
Pre-AF

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

164
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focus Hold

Locks the focus while the key to which the Focus Hold function has been assigned is pressed.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ assign the [Focus Hold] function to the desired key.

2 Focus and press the key to which the [Focus Hold] function has been assigned.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

165
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Pre-AF

The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Pre-AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
[Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.

During focusing operations, the screen may shake.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

166
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Priority Set in AF-S

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF],
[DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is remaining still.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Priority Set in AF-C

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

167
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Priority Set in AF-C

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the
subject is in motion.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Priority Set in AF-S

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

168
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF Illuminator

The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing
the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.
If a flash with an AF illuminator function is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe, when the flash is turned on, the AF
illuminator of the flash will turn on as well.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Illuminator] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.

Note
You cannot use [AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is moving (when the focus indicator /
lights up).
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.
When a Mount Adaptor is attached.

The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close
range.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

169
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Aperture Drive in AF

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Aperture Drive in AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Focus Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.
Standard:
Uses the standard aperture drive system.
Silent Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in
[Standard].

Note
When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the
monitor. To avoid these phenomena, change the setting to [Standard].

When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.

The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting conditions.

Related Topic
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

170
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AF in Focus Mag.

You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While
the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than [Spot] under [ Focus Area].

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].

2 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Magnifier].

3 Magnify the image by pressing the center of the multi-selector, and then adjust the position by pressing the
multi-selector up/down/left/right.

The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

The focus will be achieved at point of (plus mark) in the center of the screen.

5 Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.

Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.

You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the
focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.

The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.

[AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

During movie shooting
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Eye AF]
[Pre-AF]
[ Face/Eye Prior. in AF]

171
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

172
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Auto Magnifier in MF

Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Auto Magnifier in MF] → [On].

2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.

Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Focus
Magnif. Time].

Note
You cannot use [Auto Magnifier in MF] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

[Auto Magnifier in MF] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

173
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focus Magnifier

You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [Auto Magnifier in MF], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Magnifier].

2 Press the center of the multi-selector to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge by
pressing the multi-selector up/down/left/right.

Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Initial
Focus Mag.] or [ Initial Focus Mag.].

3 Confirm the focus.

Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [AF in Focus
Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing,
different functions are performed depending on the [AF in Focus Mag.] setting.

When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.

When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus
Assistant] → [ Focus Magnif. Time].

To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on.

Hint
[Focus Magnifier] is assigned to the 5 button (Custom button 5) in the default settings.

While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.

To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus magnifier
function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Related Topic
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)

174
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
AF in Focus Mag.
Touch Operation

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

175
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)

Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [Auto Magnifier in MF] or [Focus Magnifier] function.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.

Related Topic
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

176
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] →[ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x4.0:
Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

177
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Full-frame shooting

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x2.1:
Displays a 2.1-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting

x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x1.5:
Displays a 1.5-times enlarged image.

Related Topic
Focus Magnifier

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

178
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Peaking Display

Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus. When shooting a movie, you can also use the peaking function with auto focus.

1 MENU → (Focus) → [Peaking Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking. ([On] / [Off])
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas. ([High] / [Mid] / [Low])
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas. ([Red] / [Yellow] / [Blue] / [White])

Hint
[Peaking Display Select] is assigned to the right side of the control wheel in the default settings.

Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.

The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.

Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

179
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [ Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure Comp.] → desired setting.

+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.

Hint
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.

Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.

Related Topic
Exposure step (still image/movie)
Exp.comp.set
Cont. Bracket

180
Single Bracket
Zebra Display

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

181
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Histogram display

A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by luminance.
To display the histogram on the shooting screen or playback screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button repeatedly.

How to read the histogram

The histogram indicates darker values toward the left and brighter values toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.
A peak at the right or left end of the histogram indicates that the image has an overexposed or underexposed area,
respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform exposure compensation before
shooting as necessary.

(A): Pixel count

(B): Brightness

Note
The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information about image displayed on the
screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.

The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:
When the flash is used
When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene

Related Topic
Using the DISP (Display Setting) button
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

182
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Exposure step (still image/movie)

You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure step] → desired setting.

Menu item details

0.5EV / 0.3EV

Related Topic
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

183
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)

Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering

mode.

2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.

You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU →
(Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight

Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [ Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.

The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.

The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [ Exposure Std. Adjust].

The value set in [ Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The
amount of exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.

If you set [ Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.

Related Topic
Metering Mode (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

184
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)

By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ D-Range Optimizer] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not adjust brightness and gradation.
D-Range Optimizer:
If you select [D-Range Optimizer: Auto], the camera will automatically adjust the brightness and gradation. To optimize
the gradation of a recorded image by individual areas, select an optimization level from [D-Range Optimizer: Lv1] (weak)
to [D-Range Optimizer: Lv5] (strong).

Note
In the following situations, [ D-Range Optimizer] is fixed to [Off]:
When [ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
[Log Shooting] is set to other than [Off]

When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

185
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Metering Mode (still image/movie)

Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Metering Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire
screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the
metering circle depends the setting for [ Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.

Hint
The spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area by using [Focus Point Link].

When [Multi] is selected and [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on
detected faces.

When [ Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] function is activated, the brightness and the contrast
will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow. Make
settings based on the shooting circumstances.

Note
[ Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom

In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.

Related Topic
AE lock
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
186
Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)
D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

187
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)

Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.

Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].

When [ Face/Eye Prior. in AF] is set to [On] and [ Face/Eye Subject] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF], [ Face
Priority in Multi Metering] does not work.

Related Topic
Metering Mode (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

188
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [ Focus Area] is set to the following
parameters:

[Spot: S]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: L]

[Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Spot S]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot L]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Note
Even if the spot metering position is coordinated with the [Tracking] start position, it will not be coordinated with the tracking of the
subject.

When [ Focus Area] is set to the following parameters, the spot metering position is locked to the center.
[Wide]
[Zone]
[Center Fix]
[Tracking: Wide]/[Tracking: Zone]/[Tracking: Center Fix]

Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Metering Mode (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

189
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AE lock

When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject
near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the
exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign [AEL toggle] to the key.

2 Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.

3 Press the button to which [AEL toggle] is assigned.

The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) is displayed.

4 Focus on the subject again and press the shutter button.

To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the [AEL toggle] function is assigned.

Hint
If you select the [AEL hold] function in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can lock the exposure as
long as you are holding down the button. You cannot set the [AEL hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].

Note
[ AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical zoom.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

190
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

AEL w/ Shutter

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [AEL w/ Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [
Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that
the subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is canceled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust
focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.

Note
When [AEL toggle] is assigned to any key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], operation using the key
will be given priority over the [AEL toggle] settings.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

191
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Zebra Display

Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Zebra Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern. ([Off] / [On])
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern. ([70] / [75] / [80] / [85] / [90]/ [95] / [100] / [100+])

Hint
[Zebra Display Select] is assigned to the left side of the control wheel in the default settings.

You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [ Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom 1] and [Custom 2]
respectively in the default settings.

To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on
areas that fall within the range you set.

To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.

Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

192
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

ISO (still image/movie)

Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.

1 ISO (ISO sensitivity) button → desired setting.

You can also select MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO].

You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the front dial as well as by turning the control wheel. You
can change the value by 1 EV steps by turning the rear dial.

Menu item details

ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 40 – ISO 409600:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].

The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.

The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-
motion/quick-motion movies.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 80 and 409600 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 80, the
setting is automatically switched to 80. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [ Picture Profile].

The available ISO sensitivity range changes when outputting RAW movies to another device connected via HDMI.

Note
[ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 80, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.

When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted
within the set range.

If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted areas in
the images may be recorded as black areas.

193
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

194
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)

You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and

select the desired values.

To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →
(Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select
[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].

Note
ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified
range, reset [ ISO Range Limit].

Related Topic
ISO (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

195
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

ISO AUTO Min. SS

If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter
speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera
shake.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.

Menu item details

SLOWER (Slower)/SLOW (Slow):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less
noise.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
FAST (Fast)/FASTER (Faster):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and
subject blurring.
1/8000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Slower], [Slow], [Standard], [Fast], and [Faster]
is 1 EV.

Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with
an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].

In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/250
second.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the
speed automatically determined by the camera.)

Related Topic
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
ISO (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

196
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

White Balance (still image/movie)

Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ White Balance] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto / Auto: Ambience / Auto: White / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy /
Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White / Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight
/ Flash (only when shooting still images) / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.

Hint
[ White Balance] is assigned to the 2 button (Custom button 2) in the default settings.

You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the rear dial instead of
pressing the right side of the control wheel.

If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.

(Auto: Ambience), (Auto: White) is displayed only when [ Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].

If you want to moderate abrupt white balance switching, such as when the recording environment switches during movie
recording, you can change the white balance switching speed with the [Shockless WB] function.

Note
[ White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

You cannot select [Auto] or [Underwater Auto] under [ White Balance] in the following situation:
When [Log Shooting] is set to [Cine EI Quick] or [Cine EI]

If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].

Do not cover the visible light and IR sensor when [ White Balance] is set to [Auto]. If you do so, the light source may be
erroneously classified, and the white balance may be adjusted to an inappropriate color.

197
Related Topic
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)
WB bracket
Shockless WB

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

198
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended to use the custom white
balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ White Balance] → Select from among [Custom 1]
to [Custom 3], and then press the right side of the control wheel.

2 Select (custom white balance set), and then press the center of the control wheel.

3 Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-balance capture frame, and then press the
center of the control wheel.

After the shutter sound is heard and the message [Captured the custom WB data.] is displayed, the calibrated
values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.
You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the
control wheel.
After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine adjustment screen by pressing the right side of
the control wheel. You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.
No shutter sound is produced in the following cases.
In the movie recording mode
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On]
When [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]

4 Press the center of the control wheel.

The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the MENU display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by the another setting.

Note
The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example when the
subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again. When
an error value is set, the indicator (custom white balance) turns orange on the recording information display. The indicator
will be displayed in white when the set value is in the expected range.

If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash.
Be sure to use a flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a flash.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

199
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [ White
Balance] is set to [Auto].

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

200
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Shutter AWB Lock

You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [ White Balance] is set
to [Auto] or [Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the
shutter button pressed halfway down.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Shutter Half Press:
Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting:
Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off:
Operates with the normal auto white balance.

About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]
to the custom key. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the
button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the
button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.

If you want to lock the white balance while recording a movie in the auto white-balance mode, also assign [AWB Lock
Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] to the custom key.

Hint
When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because
the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting], and
do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [ White Balance] to
[Flash].

Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

201
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Shockless WB

Sets the speed at which the white balance switches during movie recording, such as when the setting for [ White
Balance] or [ Priority Set in AWB] is changed.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [Shockless WB] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
The white balance will switch immediately if you change the white balance setting during movie recording.
1 (Fast)/2/3 (Slow):
You can select the speed at which the white balance switches during movie shooting in order to make the white balance
of the movie change more smoothly.
The speed settings in the order of fastest to slowest are [1 (Fast)], [2], and [3 (Slow)].

Note
This function does not affect the speed at which the white balance changes when [ White Balance] is set to [Auto] or
[Underwater Auto].

Even if a setting other than [Off] is selected, the following will be immediately applied to the movie regardless of the speed
setting.
Fine adjustments to the color tones
Changes to the color temperature using [C.Temp./Filter]

Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

202
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Log shooting

Log shooting can be divided into three methods: “Flexible ISO,” “Cine EI,” and “Cine EI Quick.” The differences between
normal movie shooting and each Log shooting mode are as follows.

Normal movie Log shooting: Log shooting: Cine Log shooting: Cine EI
Item
shooting Flexible ISO EI Quick

Type of shooting ITU709/BT.2020 Log Log Log

Shooting with EI Shooting with EI

ISO sensitivity/EI ISO sensitivity can ISO sensitivity (The ISO sensitivity for (The ISO sensitivity for
(Exposure Index) be adjusted can be adjusted recording is locked to recording is locked to
Base ISO) Base ISO)

Set automatically
Base ISO ― ― Setting is required
according to the EI

Amount of freedom of
color grading in post- Low Middle High High
production

For details on Log shooting, refer to the following website.

https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

203
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Log Shooting Setting

Configures the settings for Log shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Log Shooting Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Log Shooting:
Switches the recording mode during Log shooting. (Off / Flexible ISO / Cine EI Quick / Cine EI)
Color Gamut:
Sets the color gamut. ( / )
Embed LUT File:
Sets whether to embed LUT files in recorded data. (On / Off)

[Log Shooting] mode details

Details of each Log shooting mode are as follows.

Flexible ISO:
A shooting mode that allows you to record S-Log material by adjusting the exposure settings including ISO sensitivity
according to the shooting scene.
Cine EI Quick:
A shooting mode in which movies are recorded using a Base ISO, as is the case with the Cine EI mode, but the Base
ISO switches automatically according to the adjusted EI value.
Cine EI:
A shooting mode that allows you to shoot with two Base ISO settings that can express clear images with the maximum
dynamic range and suppressed noise.

Confirming the Log shooting settings displayed on the screen

Depending on the [Log Shooting] settings, the part marked with (A) indicating ISO sensitivity on the movie shooting
screen changes.

The displayed contents may differ from the actual display.

When [Log Shooting] is set to [Off] or [Flexible ISO]:

ISO sensitivity is displayed.
Example: ISO 400, ISO 400
204
When [Log Shooting] is set to [Cine EI Quick] or [Cine EI]:
The EI value, latitude, Base ISO ([L] for low sensitivity and [H] for high sensitivity) are displayed.
Example: 800EI/6.0E/L
The second numerical value of the setting indicates how many steps of brightness information are assigned for bright
areas (brightness higher than 18% gray). Areas brighter than these are overexposed.
Example: In “800EI/6.0E,” 6.0 steps are assigned on the bright side.
Hint
To output RAW movies to another device connected via HDMI, set [Log Shooting] to an item other than [Off]. The [Color Gamut]
setting is also applied to RAW movies output via HDMI.

Note
[Embed LUT File] is locked to [Off] when using SD cards or SDHC cards.

When [Log Shooting] is set to an item other than [Off], this may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In such a case,
temporarily set [Log Shooting] to [Off], perform the custom setup, and then reset [Log Shooting] to the desired setting.

Related Topic
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Log shooting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

205
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Select LUT

Selects which LUT to apply to movies. You can choose the LUT from among three presets and 16 LUTs that you can
register.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Select LUT] → desired setting.

Menu item details

S-Log3:
Emphasizes the expression of gradations from shadow to mid-tone. The tone of the images is similar to the
characteristics of images that have been scanned from film for shooting.
s709:
Selects the s709 LUT for color tones similar to the film color preferred in movie and drama productions.
709(800%):
Selects the R709 LUT for contrast in color tones with true-to-life color reproduction.
User1–User16:
Selects registered LUTs. LUTs can be edited and registered by selecting User1–User16, and pressing the right side of
the control wheel to open the setting detail screen.

Related Topic
Log Shooting Setting
Manage User LUTs
Display LUT

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

206
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Manage User LUTs

You can register LUTs as User1–User16 on the camera. Also, you can change the settings for the registered LUT files.

Registering a LUT by using a memory card

1. Save the LUT file you want to register on a memory card.

Save the file to the following path.

For SD cards: /Private/Sony/PRO/LUT
For CFexpress cards: /Sony/PRO/LUT

File format: CUBE file (.cube) for a 17-point or 33-point

File name: 63 alphanumeric characters (single-byte code) or less including “.cube”

2. MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Manage User LUTs] → [Import/Edit].

3. Select the user LUT area (User1–User16) in which to register the data.

4. Select [Media].

5. Select the memory card on which the LUT file is stored.

6. Select the file you want to register and select [OK].

Registering a LUT by using C3 Portal

This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.4.00 or later.
Use the smartphone application Creators’ App for enterprise for registration.
For details on Creators’ App for enterprise, refer to the following website.
https://helpguide.sony.net/promobile/c3p_app/v1/en/index.html

A service contract is required to use C3 Portal.

1. Connect the camera to the smartphone application Creators’ App for enterprise.

2. MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Manage User LUTs] → [Import/Edit].

3. Select the user LUT area (User1–User16) in which to register the data.

4. Select [Cloud(Private)] or [Cloud(Share)].

5. Select the file you want to register and select [OK].

Editing a LUT
The following edits can be made to a user LUT area.
Input: Selects either [ ] or [ ].
AE Level Offset: Sets the compensation value for the AE tracking level when using this LUT. (0EV, 1/3EV, 2/3EV, 1EV,
4/3EV, 5/3EV, 2EV).
Import: Registers a LUT file to the selected User number.

207
Delete: Deletes the LUT file registered to the selected User number.
To delete LUTs in bulk
1. MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Manage User LUTs] → [Delete All].
All of the LUTs registered to User1–User16 are deleted.

Note
When using SD cards or SDHC cards, filenames for registering LUT files are displayed in the 8.3 format.

Related Topic
Select LUT
Display LUT
C3 Portal

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

208
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Base ISO

Sets the ISO sensitivity (Base ISO) on which Cine EI mode shooting is based. You can select from two Base ISO values,
one with a low sensitivity and one with a high sensitivity. By selecting the Base ISO according to the shooting
environment, you can shoot while maintaining a balance in latitude of highlights and shadows.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Base ISO] → desired setting.

Menu item details

ISO 800:
Sets the base ISO sensitivity to ISO 800.
ISO 12800:
Sets the base ISO sensitivity to ISO 12800.

Related Topic
Log Shooting Setting
Exposure Index

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

209
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Exposure Index

Sets the EI (Exposure Index) value that is reflected on the monitor when [ Display LUT] is set to [On].
In the Cine EI and Cine EI Quick modes, the brightness of the movie is adjusted according to the EI value, enabling you
to check the results of post-production exposure sensitivity adjustments while shooting. The EI value can be set within
the range of ±2EV from the value equal to the Base ISO.

1 MENU → ( Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Exposure Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When the Base ISO is ISO 800:
200EI–3200EI
When the Base ISO is ISO 12800:
3200EI–51200EI

Related Topic
Base ISO
Display LUT

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

210
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Display LUT

The monitor can display images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback for a preview of the image
after color grading.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Display LUT] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback.
Off:
Does not display images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback.

Hint
If you assign [Display LUT Switch] to [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can switch [ Display LUT] on and off simply by pressing
a button.

Related Topic
Select LUT
Manage User LUTs

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

211
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Creative Look (still image/movie)

“Look” is a term referring to the looks and impressions of images generated by various factors, such as color, sharpness,
brightness, etc. With [ Creative Look], you can choose the finish of an image by selecting a preferred look from
among preinstalled looks. In addition, you can fine-tune the contrast, highlights, shadows, fade, saturation, sharpness,
sharpness range, and clarity for each “Look.”

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Creative Look].

2 Select the desired “Look” or [Custom Look] using the top/bottom of the control wheel.

3 To adjust (Contrast), (Highlights), (Shadows), (Fade), (Saturation), (Sharpness),

(Sharpness Range) and (Clarity), move to the right using the right side of the control wheel. Select the
desired item using the right/left sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.

4 When selecting [Custom Look], move to the right using the right side of the control wheel, and then select
the desired “Look.”

Using [Custom Look], you can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.

Menu item details

ST:
Standard finish for a wide range of subjects and scenes.
PT:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.

212
 NT:
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing
image material to be modified with a computer.
VV:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
VV2:
Creates an image with bright and vivid colors with rich clarity.
FL:
Creates an image with moody finish by applying sharp contrast to the calm coloring as well as the impressive sky and
colors of the greens.
IN:
Creates an image with matte textures by suppressing the contrast and saturation.
SH:
Creates an image with bright, transparent, soft, and vivid mood.
BW:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
SE:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Custom Look):
Select the six custom look (the boxes with numbers on the left side) to register preferred settings. Then select the
desired settings using the right button.
You can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.

To adjust in greater detail

Based on each “Look,” items such as contrast can be adjusted to your liking. You can adjust not only the preset “Looks,”
but also each [Custom Look], a function that allows you to register your favorite settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
of the control wheel.
When a setting value is changed from the default value, (asterisk) is added next to the “Look” icon displayed on the
shooting screen.

Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image. (-9 to +9)
Highlights:
Adjusts the brightness of the bright areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
Shadows:
Adjusts the darkness of the dark areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
Fade:
Adjusts the degree of fade. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued. (-9 to +9)
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened. (0 to 9)
Sharpness Range:
Adjust the range where the sharpness effect is applied. A larger value makes the sharpness effect apply to finer outlines.
(1 to 5)
Clarity:
Adjusts the degree of clarity. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)

213
To reset adjusted values for each “Look”
Adjusted values such as contrast that you have changed as desired can be collectively reset for each “Look.” Press the
(delete) button on the adjustment screen for the “Look” that you want to reset. All adjusted values that have been
changed will return to their default values.
Hint
For [Sharpness], [Sharpness Range], and [Clarity], take a test shot and either enlarge and play it on the camera monitor, or
output it to a playback device to check the effect. Then, readjust the setting if needed.

Note
[ Creative Look] is fixed to [-] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
[Log Shooting] is set to other than [Off].

When this function is set to [BW] or [SE], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.

In the movie mode, [Sharpness Range] cannot be adjusted.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

214
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Picture Profile (still image/movie)

Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.
For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html
Although [ Picture Profile] can be used for both still images and movies, the function is designed mainly for movies.

Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting
these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.

2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.

Using the preset of the picture profile

The default settings [PP1] through [PP11] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → desired setting.

PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma.
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.
PP11:
Example setting using [S-Cinetone] gamma.
PPLUT1–PPLUT4 (only when shooting movies):
Shoots and records movies with the user LUT applied.

215
To register user LUTs (PPLUT1–PPLUT4)
You can apply the LUT of your choice to the recorded images by assigning user LUTs registered using [Manage User
LUTs] to PPLUT1–PPLUT4.
Setting procedure:

1. Select PPLUT1–PPLUT4 on the selection screen for [ Picture Profile], and then press the right side of the control
wheel.
2. Select [Basic Look] and press the center.
3. Select a LUT to use as [Basic Look] from the listed user LUTs.

HDR movie recording

The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.

Items of the picture profile

Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)

Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
S-Cinetone: Gamma curve designed to achieve cinematic gradations and color expressions. This setting enables
shooting with softer color reproduction ideal for portrait shooting.
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.

Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
216
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))

Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
When [Gamma] is set to the following, and [Mode] is set to [Auto], [Knee] is unavailable. [Knee] can be used when
[Mode] is set to [Manual].
[Still]
[Cine1]
[Cine2]
[Cine3]
[Cine4]
[S-Log3]
[HLG]
[HLG1]
[HLG2]
[HLG3]

Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.

Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode ].

Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)

Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))

Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
S-Cinetone: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [S-Cinetone].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).

Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

Color Phase

217
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)

Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispening: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → [Copy].

To reset the picture profile to the default setting

You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → [Reset].
Note
If you want to select different settings for movies and still images, add a check mark to [Picture Profile] under [Different Set for
Still/Mv].

If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth

If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.

There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting the lens compensation to
[Off].

When using the S-Log3 gamma, noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise is still
considerable even after processing the images, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log3.

Setting [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform custom setup with a gamma other
than [S-Log3] first, and then reselect the [S-Log3] gamma.

Setting PPLUT1–PPLUT4 may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, first perform the custom setup with
a setting other than PPLUT1–PPLUT4, and then reselect PPLUT1–PPLUT4.

218
 If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.

S-Gamut3.Cine and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not support the
whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.

[ Picture Profile] is fixed to [Off] in the following situation:

[Log Shooting] is set to other than [Off]

Related Topic
Gamma Display Assist
Different Set for Still/Mv

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

219
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Drive Mode

Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Single Shooting:
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting:
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer(Single) :
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Self-timer(Cont):
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket:
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket:
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
WB bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

220
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Cont. Shooting

Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Cont. Shooting].

Menu item details

Continuous Shooting: Hi+ / Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/
Continuous Shooting: Lo

Number of still images recordable with continuous shooting

The following table shows estimated numbers of recordable still images with [Drive Mode] set to [Continuous Shooting:
Hi+]. The numbers may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the memory card.

Image Size:[L: 12M]

Number of images when JPEG is Number of images when HEIF is

File Format
selected selected

JPEG/HEIF (Fine) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more

RAW (Compressed RAW) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more

RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF (Compressed

Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
RAW)*

RAW (Uncompressed RAW) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more

RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF

Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
(Uncompressed RAW)*

* When [JPEG Quality]/[HEIF Quality] is set to [Fine].

Numbers of recordable images are estimates based on shooting under the following conditions:

Using a Sony CEA-G160T CFexpress Type A memory card (sold separately)

Number of memory cards inserted: 1

Hint
To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:
[ Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]
[AEL w/ Shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]

Note

221
 When the F-value is greater than F11 in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+], [Continuous Shooting: Hi] or [Continuous Shooting: Mid]
mode, the focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.

The subject is not displayed in real time on the monitor during continuous shooting in the [Continuous Shooting: Hi+] mode.

The speed of continuous shooting decreases when shooting in uncompressed RAW.

The speed of continuous shooting decreases when you shoot with a flash.

Related Topic
Remain Shoot Display (still image)
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
AEL w/ Shutter

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

222
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Self-timer(Single)

Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer
to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing the shutter button.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Self-timer(Single)].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated number of seconds have
elapsed.

Menu item details

The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.

Self-timer(Single): 10 sec
Self-timer(Single): 5 sec
Self-timer(Single): 2 sec

Hint
Press the shutter button again to stop the count of the self-timer.

Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Single Shooting] to cancel the self-timer.

Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer countdown.

To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode, then select MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive
Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Bracket].

Related Topic
Audio signals

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

223
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Self-timer(Cont)

Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Self-timer(Cont)].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and pictures are taken after the designated number of seconds has
elapsed. The designated number of pictures are taken continuously.

Menu item details

For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when [Self-
timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.

Hint
Press the shutter button again to stop the count of the self-timer.

Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Single Shooting] to cancel the self-timer.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

224
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Cont. Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
an image that suits your purpose after recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Cont. Bracket].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.

Menu item details

For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3
EV when [Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.

Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.

When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket]
is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

225
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Single Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
the image that suits your purpose after recording.
Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you can adjust the focus or the composition for
each shot.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Single Bracket].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Press the shutter button for each image.

Menu item details

For example, when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected, three images are shot one at a time with the exposure
value shifted up and down in increments of 0.3 EV.

Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.

When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

226
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Indicator during bracket shooting

On the [Display All Info.] or [Histogram] screen, you can use the bracket indicator to confirm the bracket shooting
settings.

Ambient light* bracketing

3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV

* Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a
moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."

Hint
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under the bracket indicator.

When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records images.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

227
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

WB bracket

Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [WB bracket].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Menu item details

White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK-1*).
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK-1*).
*MK-1 is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and indicates the same value as
"mired."

Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

228
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

DRO Bracket

You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [DRO Bracket].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Menu item details

DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).

Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Related Topic
Bracket Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

229
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Bracket Settings

You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance
bracketing.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released
if using the self-timer.
(Off/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)

Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

230
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Interval Shoot Func.

You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a time-lapse movie from the still images produced by interval shooting
using the computer software Imaging Edge Desktop (Viewer). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the
camera.

For details on time-lapse movies, refer to the support page for Imaging Edge Desktop.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Interval Shoot Func.] → Select an item to set, and then select
the desired setting.

3 Press the shutter button.

When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.

When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.

Menu item details

Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([Off]/[On])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9 999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Shutter Type in Interval:
Sets the shutter type during interval shooting. ([Mechanical Shutter]/[Electronic Shutter])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([Off]/[On])

Hint

231
 If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.

To return to the normal shooting mode, set [Interval Shooting] to [Off].

If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
[AEL hold]
[ AEL hold]
[AF/MF Selector Hold]
[Regist. AF Area hold]
[AWB Lock Hold]

If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.

Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.

Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.

When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.

During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using
the customized dial or control wheel.

During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.

[Shutter Type in Interval] is set to [Electronic Shutter] as a default, regardless of the setting for [Shutter Type].

Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto]

Related Topic
Cont. Play for Interval
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

232
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

JPEG/HEIF Switch

Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) of the still image to be recorded.
The JPEG format has general compatibility. You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format
has high compression efficiency. The camera can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format.
Depending on the computer or software, you may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible
environment is required to play back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by
connecting the camera and the TV via HDMI.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [JPEG/HEIF Switch] → desired setting.

Menu item details

JPEG:
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the JPEG format. This setting gives priority to compatibility.
HEIF(4:2:0):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:0) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality and compression efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:2):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:2) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality.

Hint
Depending on the setting for [JPEG/HEIF Switch], items related to the file format ([ File Format], etc.) will switch to JPEG or
HEIF.

Note
HEIF image files recorded with this camera cannot be displayed on other cameras that do not support the HEIF file format. Be
careful not to accidentally erase HEIF image files by formatting the memory card or deleting the files.

When recording in the HEIF format with [HLG Still Image] set to [Off], the color space is recorded in sRGB. When [HLG Still
Image] is set to [On], it is recorded in the BT.2100 color space (BT.2020 color gamut).

Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

233
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)

Sets the file format for still images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Image Quality Settings] → [ File Format] → desired
setting.

Menu item details

RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF:
A RAW image and a JPEG or HEIF image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files,
a JPEG or HEIF for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG/HEIF:
The image is recorded in the JPEG or HEIF format.

When [ Recording Media] is set to [Sort Recording], you can select the file format for each slot from among RAW
and JPEG, or RAW and HEIF.

About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge Desktop is needed. With Imaging
Edge Desktop, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits
in the following shooting modes:
[Cont. Shooting] when [RAW File Type] is set to [Compressed]

You can set the compression method for RAW images using [RAW File Type].

Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG or HEIF format.

An environment supporting the HEIF format is required to play back HEIF images.

Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type

234
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

235
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type

Selects the file type for RAW images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Image Quality Settings] → [RAW File Type] → desired
setting.

Menu item details

Uncompressed:
Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When [Uncompressed] is selected for [RAW File Type], the file size of
the image will be larger than if it were recorded in compressed RAW format.

Compressed:
Records images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be approximately half of that with
[Uncompressed].

Hint
The [RAW File Type] icons are displayed as shown below.
Uncompressed:
Compressed:

The aspect ratio for RAW images is always 3:2. JPEG/HEIF images are recorded with the aspect ratio set in [Aspect Ratio] when
RAW images and JPEG/HEIF images are recorded at the same time.

The image size for RAW images corresponds to the “L” size for JPEG images.

Note
You cannot record RAW images with different formats to Slot 1 and Slot 2. Even when [ Recording Media] is set to [Sort
Recording], each slot has the same setting for [RAW File Type].

Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

236
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality

Selects the image quality when recording JPEG or HEIF images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Image Quality Settings] → [JPEG Quality]/[HEIF Quality]
→ desired setting.

Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:
The compression rate increases in the order of [Extra fine], [Fine], and [Standard], and the size of the data is reduced
accordingly. The number of images that can be recorded on one memory card increases with a higher compression rate,
but the image quality will decline.

When [ Recording Media] is set to [Sort Recording], you can select the image quality for each slot.

Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

237
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Image Quality Settings] → [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)

L: 12M 4240×2832 pixels

M: 5.1M 2768×1848 pixels

S: 3.0M 2128×1416 pixels

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)

L: 11M 3776×2832 pixels

M: 4.6M 2464×1848 pixels

S: 2.7M 1888×1416 pixels

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)

L: 10M 4240×2384 pixels

M: 4.3M 2768×1560 pixels

S: 2.6M 2128×1200 pixels

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

238
 Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)

L: 8.0M 2832×2832 pixels

M: 3.4M 1840×1840 pixels

S: 2.0M 1408×1408 pixels

Hint
When recording in the M or S size, the pixel number will not change even if you switch the angle of view between the full-frame
size and APS-C size.

Note
The L size cannot be selected when shooting in the APS-C size. If you shoot in the APS-C size while the L size is selected, the
image size will switch to the M size temporarily.

Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Aspect Ratio

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

239
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Aspect Ratio

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.

Menu item details

3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
1:1:
The aspect ratio is 1:1.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

240
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

HLG Still Image

By using gamma characteristics equivalent to HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma: standard for HDR images), you can shoot still
images with a wide dynamic range and a wide color gamut compatible with BT.2020.
[HLG Still Image] can only be set when shooting in the HEIF format. Set [JPEG/HEIF Switch] to [HEIF(4:2:0)] or
[HEIF(4:2:2)], and [ File Format] under [Image Quality Settings] to [HEIF] beforehand.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [HLG Still Image] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Shoots HLG still images.
Off:
Shoots normal still images.

Hint
You can reproduce a wider range of brightness by playing back HLG still images on an HLG-compatible TV or monitor.

You can display HLG still images on the camera’s monitor in almost the same quality as when they are displayed on an HLG-
(BT.2020-) compatible monitor by setting as follows.
[Gamma Display Assist]: [On]
[Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.]: [Auto] or [HLG(BT.2020)]

Note
In the following situations, [HLG Still Image] is fixed to [Off]:
[JPEG/HEIF Switch] is set to [JPEG]
[ File Format] under [Image Quality Settings] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & HEIF]
When a shooting mode other than P / A / S / M is set during still image shooting
When the ISO sensitivity is temporarily activated by the [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] function
When the [DRO Bracket] function under [Drive Mode] is temporarily activated by the [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] function

When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], the following functions are not available.
[D-Range Optimizer]
[ Creative Look]
[DRO Bracket] under [Drive Mode]
[ Picture Profile]

When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], the available ISO range changes.

Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Gamma Display Assist

241
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

242
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Color Space

The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color
space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Color Space] → desired setting.

Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”

Note
The [Color Space] setting is invalid when shooting images in the HEIF format. If [HLG Still Image] is set to [Off], images will be
recorded with the sRGB color space. When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], it is recorded in the BT.2100 color space (BT.2020
color gamut).

[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.

When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.

Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
HLG Still Image

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

243
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

File Format (movie)

Selects the movie file format.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

File
Characteristics
Format

Records 4K movies in the XAVC HS format.

The XAVC HS format uses the HEVC codec, which has high compression efficiency. The camera can
XAVC HS
record movies with higher image quality than XAVC S movies but the same data volume. Long GOP
4K
compression is used for movies.

XAVC S 4K Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160). Long GOP compression is used for movies.

XAVC S
Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
HD

Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.

XAVC S-I The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than
4K Long GOP compression.

Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.

XAVC S-I The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than
HD Long GOP compression.

Records movies in the XAVC S-I format with DCI 4K resolution (4096×2160).
XAVC S-I The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than
DCI 4K* Long GOP compression.

* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

Intra/Long GOP is a movie compression format. Intra compresses the movie by frame, and Long GOP compresses
multiple frames. Intra compression has better response and flexibility when editing, but Long GOP compression has
better compression efficiency.

Note
To play back XAVC HS 4K movies on a smartphone or computer, you need a device or software with high processing capability
that supports the HEVC codec.

When recording 4K movies, [ Shooting] becomes disabled and locked to [Off].

244
 If an APS-C size dedicated lens is attached, the edges of the screen may appear dark. When recording 4K movies with this
camera, we recommend using a lens compatible with the 35 mm full-frame format.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

245
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Movie Settings (movie)

Sets the frame rate, bit rate, color information, etc.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Movie Settings] → [Rec Frame Rate] → desired
setting.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Movie Settings] → [Record Setting] → desired

setting.

Example of setting values

(A): Bit rate

(B): Color sampling
(C): Bit depth

The higher the bit rate, the higher the image quality.
Color sampling (4:2:2, 4:2:0) is the recording ratio of color information. The more uniform this ratio is, the better
the color reproducibility, and it is possible to remove colors neatly even when compositing using a green screen.
Bit depth represents the gradation of luminance information. When the bit depth is 8 bits, 256 levels of gradation
can be obtained. When the bit depth is 10 bits, 1024 levels of gradation can be obtained. A larger value enables
smoother expression from dark to bright areas.
[4:2:2 10 bit] is a setting that assumes that the recorded movie will be edited on a computer. The playback
environment for [4:2:2 10 bit] is limited.

Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

59.94p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

59.94p/50p 150M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

59.94p/50p 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

59.94p/50p 75M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

59.94p/50p 45M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

23.98p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

23.98p* 100M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

246
 Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

23.98p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

23.98p* 50M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

23.98p* 30M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

119.88p/100p 280M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

119.88p/100p 200M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

59.94p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

59.94p/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

29.97p/25p 140M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

29.97p/25p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

29.97p/25p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

23.98p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

23.98p* 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

23.98p* 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

119.88p/100p 280M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

119.88p/100p 200M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

59.94p/50p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

59.94p/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

59.94p/50p 25M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

29.97p/25p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

29.97p/25p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

29.97p/25p 16M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

23.98p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

23.98p* 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

247
 Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

119.88p/100p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

119.88p/100p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

59.94p/50p 600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra

29.97p/25p 300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra

23.98p* 240M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K]

(When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later)

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

59.94p/50p 600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M 4:2:2 10bit 4096×2160 Intra

29.97p/25p 300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M 4:2:2 10bit 4096×2160 Intra

23.98p* 240M 4:2:2 10bit 4096×2160 Intra

24.00p 240M 4:2:2 10bit 4096×2160 Intra

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD]

Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format

59.94p/50p 222M 4:2:2 10bit/185M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra

29.97p/25p 111M 4:2:2 10bit/93M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra

23.98p* 89M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

Related Topic
File Format (movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

248
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

S&Q Settings

You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term
phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,
the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky. Sound will not be
recorded.

1 MODE (Mode) button → [S&Q Motion] → press the center of the control wheel.

2 Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Exposure Mode] → and select the desired
setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual
Exposure).

3 Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ S&Q Settings] → Select an item to set, and
then select the desired setting.

4 Press the REC (Recording) button to start recording.

Press the REC (Recording) button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Rec Frame Rate:
Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate.
Record Setting:
Selects the bit rate, color sampling, and bit depth of the movie.

The values that can be set for [ Rec Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting] are the same as the setting values
for [ Movie Settings].
The format of the recorded movie will be the same as the [ File Format] setting.

Playback speed when [ Rec Frame Rate] is set to 24.00p (When the camera’s system software
(firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later)
You can select the frame rates listed below only when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K].

Frame Rate Rec Frame Rate: 24.00p

48fps 2 times slower

24fps Normal playback speed

249
 Frame Rate Rec Frame Rate: 24.00p

12fps 2 times quick

6fps 4 times quick

3fps 8 times quick

2fps 12 times quick

1fps 24 times quick

Playback speed when [ Rec Frame Rate] is set to a rate other than 24.00p
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Rec Frame Rate] and [ Frame Rate].

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Frame Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate: Rec Frame Rate:
Rate 23.98p 29.97p 59.94p 119.88p

240fps 10 times slower 8 times slower 4 times slower 2 times slower

120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

Normal playback
60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower 2 times quick
speed

Normal playback
30fps 1.25 times slower 2 times quick 4 times quick
speed

15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick 8 times quick

8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick

4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick

2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick

1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick 120 times quick

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL

Frame Rate Rec Frame Rate: 25p Rec Frame Rate: 50p Rec Frame Rate: 100p

200fps 8 times slower 4 times slower 2 times slower

100fps 4 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick

25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick 4 times quick

12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick 8.33 times quick

6fps 4.16 times quick 8.33 times quick 16.66 times quick

250
 Frame Rate Rec Frame Rate: 25p Rec Frame Rate: 50p Rec Frame Rate: 100p

3fps 8.33 times quick 16.66 times quick 33.33 times quick

2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick 50 times quick

1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick 100 times quick

[240fps]/[200fps] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to following items:

XAVC HS 4K
XAVC S 4K
XAVC S-I 4K
XAVC S-I DCI 4K*

[120fps]/[100fps] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K]*

* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

Hint
For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”

Note
In slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the actual shooting time differs from the time recorded in the movie. The recordable time
displayed toward the top of the monitor shows the remaining recording time for the movie, not the remaining recording time on
the memory card.

In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this
happens, decrease the aperture value or set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.

[Time Code Run]
[Time Code Output]

Related Topic
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
Recordable movie times
Memory cards that can be used

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

251
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Proxy Settings

You can simultaneously record a low-bit-rate proxy movie when recording a movie or slow-motion recording/quick-motion
recording.
Since proxy movies are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Proxy Settings] → Select an item to set, and then
select the desired setting.

Menu item details

Proxy Recording:
Selects whether to simultaneously record proxy movies. ([On] / [Off])
Proxy File Format:
Selects the recording format of the proxy movie. ([XAVC HS HD] / [XAVC S HD])
Proxy Rec. Settings:
Selects the bit rate, color sampling and bit depth of the proxy movie. ([16M 4:2:0 10bit] / [9M 4:2:0 10bit] / [6M 4:2:0 8bit])

Selectable proxy recording settings

Proxy File Recording Recording frame Proxy Rec.

Compression codec
Format size rate Settings

16Mbps 4:2:0 10bit

Max. 59.94p/Max. MPEG-H
XAVC HS HD 1920×1080 9Mbps 4:2:0 10bit
50p HEVC/H.265

Max. 59.94p/Max.
XAVC S HD 1280×720 6Mbps 4:2:0 8bit MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
50p

Hint
Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). (proxy) is
displayed over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.

Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.

Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

Normal movie recording

[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p]

Slow-motion recording/quick-motion recording

252
 [ Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p]
[ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps]

Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.

Movies cannot be edited on this camera.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

253
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)

Sets whether or not to record with the angle of view of APS-C for still images and with an angle of view equivalent to
Super 35mm for movies. If you select [On] or [Auto], you can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Shooting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
When [On] is selected, the angle of view becomes approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.
Auto:
Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.
Off:
Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.

Note
When you attach an APS-C-compatible lens and set [ Shooting] to [Off], you may not achieve optimal shooting results.
For example, the edges of the image may become darker.

When [ Shooting] is set to [On], the angle of view is the same as when shooting with an APS-C-size image sensor.

When recording 4K movies, [ Shooting] becomes disabled and locked to [Off].

Related Topic
Angle of view

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

254
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Angle of view

The angle of view switches to the equivalent of full frame or APS-C/Super 35mm, depending on the setting for [
Shooting] and the attached lens. The angle of view is also different for still image shooting and movie shooting.

Angle of view equivalent to full frame

(A) When shooting still images

(B) When recording movies (Other than 4K 119.88p/ 100p)
(C) When recording movies (4K 119.88p/100p)

The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to full frame when [ Shooting] is set to [Off].

Angle of view equivalent to APS-C size/Super 35mm

(A) When shooting still images

(B) When recording movies (Full-HD)

The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to APS-C size or Super 35mm when [ Shooting] is set to
[On]. The angle of view is approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens for both still images and movies.
However, 4K movies cannot be recorded when [ Shooting] is set to [On].

Related Topic
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)
255
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

256
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates touch operations.
On: Playback Only:
Activates touch operations only during playback.
Off:
Deactivates touch operations.

Related Topic
Touch Func. in Shooting
Touch Sensitivity
Touch operations on the monitor
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

257
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Touch Sensitivity

Sets the touch operation sensitivity.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Sensitivity] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Sensitive:
The touch responsivity is better than with [Standard].
Standard:
Sets the touch sensitivity to normal.

Hint
If you want to deactivate touch operations on the monitor, set [Touch Operation] to [Off].

If you are not wearing gloves, set [Touch Sensitivity] to [Standard].

Note
Even if the touch sensitivity is set to [Sensitive], the touch panel/pad may not react properly depending on the gloves used.

Related Topic
Touch Operation

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

258
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Swipe Up

You can set whether to open the function menu when swiping upward on the shooting standby screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Swipe Up] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Open the Fn Menu:
The function menu opens by swiping up. You can close the function menu by swiping down from an area outside the
function menu or tapping outside the function menu.
Off:
The function menu does not open by swiping up.

Note
You cannot open the function menu by swiping up when [Touch Operation] is set to [On: Playback Only] or [Off], even if [Open the
Fn Menu] is selected.

Related Topic
Using the function menu
Touch Operation

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

259
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Touch Func. in Shooting

Sets the operation activated by touching the screen during shooting.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Touch Focus:
The focusing position is set by touching the screen during shooting.
Touch Tracking:
The subject is selected and tracking is started by touching the screen during shooting.
Off:
Disables touch operations during shooting.

Hint
You can change the setting for [Touch Func. in Shooting] by touching / / (touch function icon) on the shooting
screen.

Related Topic
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Touch Operation

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

260
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)

[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. Select MENU →
(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.
This function is available when [ Focus Area] is set to one of following parameters:

[Wide]
[Zone]
[Center Fix]
[Tracking: Wide]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Center Fix]

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → [Touch Focus].

You can change the setting for [Touch Func. in Shooting] by touching / / (touch function icon) on
the shooting screen.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
When performing auto-focusing, you can specify the position where you want to focus using touch operations. After
touching the monitor and specifying a position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

1. Touch the monitor.

Touch the subject to focus.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control
wheel.

2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode
The camera will focus on the touched subject.

1. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus, and the
focus can be adjusted using the focus ring (spot focus).
To cancel spot focus, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus mode temporarily switches to [Continuous AF]. When
the touched area is in focus, the focus mode returns to manual focus.

Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
The focusing frame for [Spot] and [Expand Spot] can be moved by dragging.
When shooting still images in the manual focusing mode, the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.

Note

261
 The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When shooting still images in the manual focusing mode
When using the digital zoom
When using the LA-EA4

Related Topic
Touch Func. in Shooting
Touch Operation
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

262
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)

You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image shooting mode and movie recording
mode.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Func. in Shooting] → [Touch Tracking].

You can change the setting for [Touch Func. in Shooting] by touching / / (touch function icon) on
the shooting screen.

2 Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.

Tracking will start.

Hint
To cancel tracking, touch (Tracking release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.

Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom

If the focus mode is switched to [Manual Focus] while [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Tracking], the setting value for
[Touch Func. in Shooting] will be changed to [Touch Focus].

Related Topic
Touch Func. in Shooting
Touch Operation

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

263
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)

You can configure settings related to the silent mode, which allows you to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic
sounds. You can also set whether or not to change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the camera
when the camera is set to the silent mode.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [ Silent Mode Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Silent Mode:
Sets whether or not to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic sounds. ([On]/[Off])
When set to [On], [Shutter Type] and [Shutter Type in Interval] become locked to [Electronic Shutter], and [Audio signals]
becomes locked to [Off].
Target Function Settings:
Sets whether or not to simultaneously change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the camera when the
camera is set to the silent mode. ([Aperture Drive in AF]/[Auto Pixel Mapping])
If you select [Not Target], the setting values for each function will be retained even in the silent mode.

Note
Use the [Silent Mode] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait rights of
the subject.

Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.

Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.

If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [On], shutter sounds may occasionally be heard when the power is turned off. This is not a
malfunction.

Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur.

If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from other cameras or fluorescent
lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.

Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], you may hear shutter sounds when you register a face using [Face Memory].

When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Long Exposure NR
e-Front Curtain Shut.
BULB shooting
Anti-flicker Shoot.

Related Topic
Shutter Type
Interval Shoot Func.
Aperture Drive in AF

264
Auto Pixel Mapping

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

265
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Shutter Type

You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Shutter Type] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Mechanical Shutter:
Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
Electronic Shutter:
Shoot with the electronic shutter only.

Hint
In the following situations, set the [Shutter Type] to [Electronic Shutter].
When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as outside in bright sunlight, the beach, or snowy
mountains.
When you want to increase the speed of continuous shooting.

Note
In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned off even if the [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic
Shutter]. However, this is not a malfunction.

Even if [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter], you may hear shutter sounds when you register a face using [Face Memory].

[Shutter Type] cannot be selected when the shooting mode is a mode other than P/A/S/M.

When [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Long Exposure NR
e-Front Curtain Shut.
BULB shooting
Anti-flicker Shoot.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

266
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

e-Front Curtain Shut.

The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between when the shutter button is pressed and the
shutter is released.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [e-Front Curtain Shut.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Off:
Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.

Note
When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached, out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may
get cut off because of the shutter mechanism. If this happens, set [e-Front Curtain Shut.] to [Off].

When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set
this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on the shooting environment. In
such cases, set [e-Front Curtain Shut.] to [Off].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

267
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [ Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,
etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.

Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an
astronomical telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

268
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Release w/o Card

Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.

Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.

The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

269
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Anti-flicker Shoot.

Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to
moments when flickering will have less of an impact.
This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the
lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Anti-flicker Shoot.] → [On].

2 Press the shutter button halfway down, and then shoot the image.

The product detects flickering when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.
Shoot the image after confirming that (flicker icon) is displayed.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not reduce influences caused by flickering.
On:
Reduces influences caused by flickering. When the camera detects flickering while the shutter button is pressed halfway
down, (flicker icon) will be displayed.

Hint
The color tone of the shot result may vary when you shoot the same scene using a different shutter speed. If that happens, we
recommend that you shoot in [Shutter Priority] or [Manual Exposure] mode with a fixed shutter speed.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down even when in manual focus mode.

When [Anti-flicker Shoot Sel.] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can switch the [Anti-flicker
Shoot.] function on or off by pressing the key.

Note
When you set [Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the image quality of the live view is reduced.

When you set [Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the shutter release lag may increase slightly. In the continuous shooting mode, the
shooting speed may slow down or the interval between shots may become irregular.

The camera detects flickering when the frequency of the light source is 100 Hz or 120 Hz only.

The camera cannot detect flickering depending on the light source and shooting conditions, such as a dark background.

Even if the camera detects flickering, the influences caused by flickering may not be reduced enough depending on the light
source or the shooting situation. We recommend that you take test shots beforehand.

[Anti-flicker Shoot.] is not available when shooting in the following situations:

While bulb shooting
When [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]
Movie shooting mode

270
 The color tone of the shot results may differ depending on the setting of [Anti-flicker Shoot.].

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

271
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

The zoom features available with this product

The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon
displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.

When a power zoom lens is mounted:

When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:

1. Optical zoom range

Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.
When a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed.
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider becomes locked at the left end of the zoom
bar while the zoom position is in the optical zoom range. The magnification is displayed as “×1.0.” If [ Zoom
Range] is set to [Optical zoom only], the zoom slider will not be displayed.

2. Smart Zoom range ( )

Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when [JPEG
Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is set to [M] or [S]).

3. Clear Image Zoom range ( )

Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration.
When you set [ Zoom Range] to [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.

4. Digital Zoom range ( )

You can magnify images using an image process.
When you set [ Zoom Range] to [Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.

Hint
The default setting for the [ Zoom Range] is [Optical zoom only].

The default setting for the [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] to [M] or [S].

Note
The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not available when shooting in the following situations:
[ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF].
[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p].
272
 During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with the [ Frame Rate] set to [240fps]/[200fps] or [120fps]/[100fps]

You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [ Focus Area] setting is disabled and the AF operates with
priority on and around the center area.

When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, [ Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].

When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, the following functions are not available:
Face/Eye Prior. in AF
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Tracking function

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
About zoom scale

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

273
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Range] → Select [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital
Zoom].

2 Zoom using the W/T (zoom) lever.

You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired key by selecting MENU → (Setup) → [Operation
Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.].
If you assign [Zoom Operation (T)] or [Zoom Operation (W)] to the desired key in advance by selecting MENU
→ (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
zoom in and out simply by pressing that key.

Hint
When a power zoom lens is attached, you can use the zoom lever or zoom ring to magnify the image. If you exceed the optical
zoom magnification, you can switch to a zoom function other than the optical zoom with the same operation.

Even when you use [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital Zoom] with a power zoom lens attached, the optical zoom is used up to the
telephoto end of the lens.

Related Topic
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

274
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Zoom Range (still image/movie)

You can select the zoom setting of the product.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Range] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] to [M] or [S].
Clear Image Zoom :
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom :
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.

Related Topic
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

275
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)

Sets the zoom speed when using the W/T (zoom) lever of the camera. The zoom speed can be set in two increments. It
can also be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Lever Speed] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

1st Zoom Spd. :
Sets the zoom speed of the first increment for shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
2nd Zoom Spd. :
Sets the zoom speed of the second increment for shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
1st Zoom Spd. :
Sets the zoom speed of the first level increment for recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
2nd Zoom Spd. :
Sets the zoom speed of the second level increment for recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))

Hint
If a high speed is set for shooting standby and a slow speed is set for movie recording, the angle of view can be changed quickly
during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.

Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.

If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

276
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)

Sets the zoom speed when using the custom key to which [Zoom Operation (T)] / [Zoom Operation (W)] is assigned.
This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Custom Key Z. Speed] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))

Hint
If a high speed is set for [Fixed Speed ] and a slow speed is set for [Fixed Speed ], the angle of view can be changed
quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.

Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.

If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

277
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)

Sets the zoom speed when performing zoom operations using the remote commander (sold separately) or the remote
shooting function via a smartphone. This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Remote Zoom Speed] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Speed Type:
Sets whether or not to lock the zoom speed. ([Variable]/[Fix])
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby when [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording when [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))

Hint
When [ Speed Type] is set to [Variable], pressing the zoom lever on the remote commander will increase the zoom speed
(some remote commanders do not support variable zoom).

If [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix], a high speed is set for [ Fixed Speed ], and a slow speed is set for [ Fixed Speed
], the angle of view can be changed quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.

Note
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

278
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

About zoom scale

The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the selected image size.

When [Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]

Full frame

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) Clear Image Zoom Digital Zoom

L: 12M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×

M: 5.1M Approx. 1.5× Approx. 3.1× Approx. 6.1×

S: 3.0M Approx. 2× Approx. 4× Approx. 8×

APS-C size

JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) Clear Image Zoom Digital Zoom

M: 5.1M Approx. 1.3× Approx. 2.6× Approx. 5.2×

S: 3.0M Approx. 2× Approx. 4× Approx. 8×

Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

279
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses
that support this function.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Left(W)/Right(T):
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed rotation.
Right(W)/Left(T):
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed rotation.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

280
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using flash (sold separately)

In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.

For details on the flash, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the product.

2 Shoot after you have turned on the flash and it is fully charged.

(Charging flash icon) blinking: Charging is in progress

(Charging flash icon) lit up: Charging is finished
The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.

Note
The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the lower part of a recorded image may be shaded.
Remove the lens hood.

You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light when using a flash (sold separately) with an LED
light.)

Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe, turn off the product first. When
attaching an accessory, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.

Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltage of 250 V or more or has the reverse
polarity of the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the screen, depending on the
shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.

The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.

When shooting with an external flash, light and dark stripes may appear on the image if the shutter speed is set to faster than
1/4000 seconds. If this occurs, Sony recommends shooting in the manual flash mode and setting the flash level to 1/2 or higher.

Related Topic
Flash Mode

281
Wireless Flash

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

282
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Flash Mode

You can set the flash mode.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.

Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.

Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.

Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

283
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Flash Comp.

Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.

Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.

Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.

If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved
and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.

Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

284
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Exp.comp.set

Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.

Related Topic
Flash Comp.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

285
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Wireless Flash

There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to
the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal
flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set
each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Wireless Flash] → [On].

2 Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash
as the commander.

3 Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver
(sold separately).

You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [
Custom Key/Dial Set.], and then pressing that key.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the wireless flash function.
On:
Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.

Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this
occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

Related Topic
External Flash Set.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

286
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Red Eye Reduction

When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

1 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.

Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to
the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

287
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

FEL lock

The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum exposure during normal flash shooting. You
can also set the flash level in advance.
FEL: Flash Exposure Level

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → desired button, then assign
the [FEL Lock toggle] function to the button.

2 Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.

3 Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash amount.

A pre-flash flashes.
The (FEL lock) lights up.

4 Adjust the composition and shoot the image.

When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which the [FEL Lock toggle] is registered again.

Hint
By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and
[FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.
When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].
When the flash cannot go off.

288
 When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.

Note
The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.

If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is displayed.

When both AE and FEL lock are fixed, (AE Lock/FEL Lock) icon lights up.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

289
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

External Flash Set.

You can configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) attached to the camera using the monitor and control wheel of
the camera.
Update the software of your flash to the latest version before using this function.
For details on flash functions, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

1 Attach the flash (sold separately) to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, and then turn on the camera
and the flash.

2 MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [External Flash Set.] → desired setting item.

3 Configure the setting using the control wheel of the camera.

Menu item details

Ext. Flash Firing Set.:
Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
Ext. Flash Cust. Set.:
Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.

Hint
If you assign [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can open the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.]
screen simply by pressing that key.

You can adjust settings by operating the flash even while you are using [External Flash Set.].

You can also configure the settings for a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) attached to the camera.

Note
You can only use [External Flash Set.] to configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) or Wireless Radio Commander (sold
separately) manufactured by Sony and attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.

You can only use [External Flash Set.] when the flash is attached directly to the camera. You cannot use this function when
shooting with an off-camera flash that is connected using a cable.

Only some of the functions of the attached flash are configurable using [External Flash Set.]. You cannot perform pairing with
other flashes, reset the flash, initialize the flash, etc. via [External Flash Set.].

[External Flash Set.] is unavailable under the following conditions:

When the flash is not attached to the camera
When a flash that does not support [External Flash Set.] is attached
When the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion], or during movie shooting

Also, [External Flash Set.] may be unavailable depending on the state of the flash.

290
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

291
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

SteadyShot (still image)

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses [ SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].

Hint
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.

If you assign [ SteadyShot Select] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can switch the [ SteadyShot]
function on or off by pressing the key.

When shooting in a dark place, the (SteadyShot) icon may blink. We recommend that you set a faster shutter speed by
decreasing the aperture value or adjusting the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

Related Topic
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

292
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

SteadyShot (movie)

Sets [ SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
Standard:
Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].

Note
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.

If you change the setting for [ SteadyShot], the angle of view will change. When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Active], the angle
of view becomes narrower.

In the following situations, [Active] cannot be selected:

For normal movies: when [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p] or higher
For slow-motion/quick-motion shooting: when [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] or higher

Related Topic
SteadyShot (still image)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

293
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)

You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [ Focal Length]. (8mm-1000mm)

Note
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after you point the camera
towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping halfway.

When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set [
SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [ Focal Length] to match the lens you are using. The currently set SteadyShot
focal length will be displayed along with the (SteadyShot) icon.

When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [ SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the
focal length.

If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You
cannot switch the settings using the camera.

Related Topic
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

294
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)

Sets the focal length information to be used for the built-in SteadyShot function when [ SteadyShot Adjust.] is set to
[Manual].

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ Focal Length] → desired setting.

Menu item details

8mm - 1000mm:
The SteadyShot function uses the focal length that you set.
Check the focal-length index on the lens and set the focal-length.

Related Topic
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

295
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Lens Compensation (still image/movie)

Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the
corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Lens Compensation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Shading Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Chromatic Aberration Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Distortion Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Breathing Comp. (only when shooting movies):
Sets whether to automatically compensate for the phenomenon in which the angle of view changes according to the
focusing distance during movie recording. ([On]/[Off])
(when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later)

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

Darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], depending on the lens type.

Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].

If [ SteadyShot] is set to [Active] in the movie recording mode, [Distortion Comp.] will become locked to [Auto].

When [Breathing Comp.] is set to [On], the angle of view and the image quality change slightly.

Depending on the lens, changes in the angle of view may not be fully compensated for even when [Breathing Comp.] is set to
[On].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

296
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Long Exposure NR

When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
[Long Exposure NR] is not available when [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

Noise reduction may not be activated even if [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:

[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].

[Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

297
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

High ISO NR

When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [High ISO NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction.

Note
[High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

When [ File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.

[High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

298
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Auto Review (still image)

You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Auto Review] → desired setting.

Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.

Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.

The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

299
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Remain Shoot Display (still image)

Sets whether or not to display an indicator of the remaining number of still images that can be continuously shot at the
same shooting speed.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Remain Shoot Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Always Display:
Always displays the indicator when shooting still images.
Shoot-Only Display:
While shooting still images, an indicator of the remaining number of still images is displayed. When you press the shutter
button halfway down, an indicator of the remaining number of still images is displayed.
Not Displayed:
Does not display the indicator.

Hint
When the internal camera memory for buffering is full, “SLOW” will be displayed and the continuous shooting speed will
decrease.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

300
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Grid Line Display (still image/movie)

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not during shooting. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of
images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [ Grid Line Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the grid line.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.

Hint
If you assign [Grid Line Display Select] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
show or hide the grid lines by pressing the assigned key.

Related Topic
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

301
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Grid Line Type (still image/movie)

Sets the displayed type of grid line. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [ Grid Line Type] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.

Hint
If you assign [ Grid Line Type] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can switch
the type of grid line each time you press the assigned key.

Related Topic
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

302
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Live View Display Set.

Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, [ Creative
Look], etc. on the screen.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [Live View Display Set.] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Live View Display:
Sets whether to reflect all the shooting settings on the monitor and display the Live View in conditions close to what your
picture will look like once the settings are applied, or to display the Live View without reflecting the settings. ([Setting
Effect ON] / [Setting Effect OFF])
If you select [Setting Effect OFF], you can easily check the composition even when shooting with the image composition
on the Live View display.
Exposure Effect:
Sets whether or not to display the Live View with automatic correction by reflecting the exposure from the flash when
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect ON]. ([Exposure Set. & flash] / [Exposure Setting Only])
When using the flash for shooting a portrait, select [Exposure Setting Only] to manually set the exposure based on the
ambient lighting.
Frame Rate Low Limit:
Sets whether or not to keep the frame rate of the Live View from becoming too slow. ([On] / [Off])
If you select [On], the frame rate of the Live View will not become slow even when shooting in a dark place, but the Live
View display may become dark.

Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.

If you select [Setting Effect OFF], Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.

When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the (VIEW) icon is displayed on the Live View screen.

Note
[Exposure Effect] is effective only when using a flash manufactured by Sony.

[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]

If you shoot movies in the still image shooting mode, the shooting settings will be reflected in Live View even when [Live View
Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF].

When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.

303
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

304
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Aperture Preview

While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview] function, the aperture is stepped down to
the set aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to shooting.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → set the [Aperture Preview]
function to the desired key.

2 When shooting still images, confirm the images by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] is
assigned.

Hint
Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture.
We recommend that you adjust the focus again.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Shot. Result Preview

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

305
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Shot. Result Preview

While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the image preview with the
DRO, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting result preview before shooting.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → set the [Shot. Result
Preview] function to the desired key.

2 When shooting still images, confirm the images by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is
assigned.

Hint
The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result
Preview], but some effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that case, the settings you have
selected will be applied to the images you shoot.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Aperture Preview

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

306
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Bright Monitoring

Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the exposure time, you can
check the composition on the monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → assign the [Bright
Monitoring] function to the desired key.

2 In a still image shooting mode, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, and
then shoot an image.

The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.

To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function
once again.

Note
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as
exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in
dark locations.

[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically canceled in the following situations.

When the camera is turned off.
When the shooting mode is changed from P/A/S/M to a mode that is not P/A/S/M.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.
When [Auto Magnifier in MF] is executed.
When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.

During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while shooting in dark locations. Also, because the
measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may change.

Related Topic
Live View Display Set.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

307
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Emphasized REC Display

Sets whether or not to display a red frame around the edges of the camera’s monitor while recording a movie. You can
easily check whether the camera is in standby or recording, even when you are looking at the camera monitor from an
angle or at a distance.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [Emphasized REC Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays a red frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Off:
Does not display a frame to indicate that recording is in progress.

Hint
The frame displayed by this function can also be output to an external monitor connected via HDMI. Set [HDMI Info. Display] to
[On].

Related Topic
HDMI Info. Display

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

308
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Marker Display

While shooting movies, you can set whether or not to display markers on the monitor, and select the types of marker.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Marker Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Marker Display:
Sets whether or not to display markers. ([On] / [Off])
Center Marker:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the middle of the shooting screen. ([Off] / [On])
Aspect Marker:
Sets the aspect marker display. ([Off] / [9:16] / [4:5] / [1:1] / [4:3] / [13:9] / [14:9] / [15:9] / [16:9]* / [17:9] / [1.66:1] / [1.85:1]
/ [1.91:1] / [2:1] / [2.35:1] / [2.39:1])
* When the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later

Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. ([Off] /
[80%] / [90%])
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
([Off] / [On])

Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.

Position the subject at the cross point of [Guideframe] to ensure a balanced composition.

Note
The markers are displayed when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion], or when shooting movies.

You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].

The markers are displayed on the monitor. (You cannot output the markers.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

309
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Gamma Display Assist

Movies with S-Log3 gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic
range. Images with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore
displayed in low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Display
Assist] function to reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Display Assist] can also
be applied when playing back movies on the camera's monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Gamma Display Assist] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the gamma display assist function.
Off:
Does not use the gamma display assist function.

Hint
If you assign [Gamma Disp. Assist Sel.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], or [
Custom Key Setting], you can turn the gamma display assist function on or off by pressing the assigned key.

Note
[Gamma Display Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.

[Gamma Display Assist] is locked to [Off] in the following situations:

When [Log Shooting] is set to other than [Off]

Related Topic
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
HLG Still Image

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

310
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

Selects the conversion type for [Gamma Display Assist].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Displays images with effects as follows according to the gamma or color mode set in [ Picture Profile].
When the gamma is set to [S-Log3]: [S-Log3→709(800%)]
When the gamma is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3], and the color mode is set to [BT.2020]:
[HLG(BT.2020)]
When the gamma is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3], and the color mode is set to [709]: [HLG(709)]

Displays images with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when shooting HLG still images with [HLG Still Image] set to [On].
Displays images with an [S-Log3→709(800%)] effect when outputting RAW movies to another device connected via
HDMI during movie shooting.

S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays images with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor to a quality that is almost the same as when images are
displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor to a quality that is almost the same as when images are
displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.

Hint
If you assign [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
switch the [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] setting.

Note
When [Gamma Display Assist] is set to [Auto] during playback, an effect is applied to the image as follows:
When playing back a movie recorded with [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]: Displays the image with an [HLG(BT.2020)] or
[HLG(709)] effect depending on the color mode.
When playing back an HLG still image shot with [HLG Still Image] set to [On]: Displays the image with an [HLG(BT.2020)]
effect.
When playing back a RAW movie output to another device connected via HDMI: Displays the image with an [S-
Log3→709(800%)] effect.

In other situations, movies are displayed according to the gamma setting and color mode setting in [ Picture Profile].

Related Topic

311
Gamma Display Assist
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
HDMI Output Settings (movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

312
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

De-Squeeze Display

During movie recording and playback, movies compressed using an anamorphic lens are displayed on the monitor with
correction (de-squeezing) to the CinemaScope aspect ratio (2.39:1) according to the ratio of the anamorphic lens.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ De-Squeeze Display] → desired setting.

Select a setting according to the magnification of the anamorphic lens that you are using.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not de-squeeze the displayed image.
1.3x:
Compressed movies are displayed with 1.3-fold horizontal correction.
2.0x:
Compressed movies are displayed with 2.0-fold horizontal correction.

Hint
When [ De-Squeeze Display] is set to [1.3x] or [2.0x], the following settings are locked.
[ Focus Mode]: [Manual Focus]
[Focus Area]: [Wide]
[ SteadyShot]: [Off]
[ Face Priority in Multi Metering]: [Off]
[Aspect Marker] under [Marker Display]: [2.39:1]

Note
[ De-Squeeze Display] is only available in the movie recording mode and slow-motion/quick-motion shooting mode.

Even if [ De-Squeeze Display] is set to [1.3x] or [2.0x], the displayed image will not be de-squeezed in the following cases.
Recording movies by pressing the MOVIE button in the still image shooting mode
Monitoring images when using [PC Remote]
Outputting images to a device connected via HDMI when [RAW Output] under [ HDMI Output Settings] is set to [On]
When [Log Shooting] under [Log Shooting Setting] is set to [Off]
Outputting HDMI images when [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)]

Still images that were extracted using [Photo Capture] from movies shot with an anamorphic lens will not be de-squeezed.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

313
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Audio Recording

Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating. This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records sound.
Off:
Does not record sound.

Related Topic
Audio Rec Level

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

314
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level of the built-in microphone and input from the microphone terminal while
checking the level meter. This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Rec Level].

2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.

Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear. Check that the volume is at the appropriate level by monitoring the audio recording volume with the
connected headphones or the volume level meter on the camera.

To reset the audio recording level to the default setting, press the (Delete) button.

Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.

[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

315
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Note
Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
microphone.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

316
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Wind Noise Reduct.

Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.
This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.

Note
The sound quality may vary from the normal recording settings when [Wind Noise Reduct.] is set to [On].

When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.

Related Topic
Audio Out Timing

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

317
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Shoe Audio Set.

Sets the digital audio transmitted from the XLR handle unit (supplied) or a microphone (sold separately) that supports the
digital audio interface, etc. attached to the multi-interface shoe of the camera. You can set the sampling frequency, the
number of quantization bits, and the number of channels. This function cannot be used during slow-motion/quick-motion
shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [ Shoe Audio Set.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 24 bits, and the number of
channels to 4.
:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 24 bits, and the number of
channels to 2.
:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 16 bits, and the number of
channels to 2.

Hint
The audio level display on the monitor is for 4 channels during 4-channel audio recording.

Note
When an external microphone (sold separately) is connected to the (microphone) terminal of the camera, the audio is
recorded from the external microphone attached to the (microphone) terminal. You cannot set [ Shoe Audio Set.].

If the attached microphone is set to analog transmission, you cannot set [ Shoe Audio Set.].

When the attached microphone does not support 4-channel audio recording, you cannot select [ ] (48khz/24bit
4ch).

When the attached microphone does not support 24-bit audio recording, [ Shoe Audio Set.] becomes locked to [
] (48khz/16bit 2ch).

Audio cannot be recorded correctly in the following situations during movie recording:
When you attach or remove the microphone
When digital transmission is switched to analog transmission or vice versa on the microphone side

Related Topic
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

318
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Recording audio using the XLR adaptor of the supplied handle

The handle (supplied) is equipped with an XLR adaptor. By attaching the handle, you can connect multiple external
audio devices to record sound.
The camera is compatible with the digital audio interface of the Multi Interface Shoe. This allows the camera and the XLR
adaptor to communicate with each other through digital signals and provide audio recording with minimum noise
interference.

Switching the audio input to the handle

By switching the audio input from the built-in microphone of the camera to the handle, you can record with the
microphone connected to the handle.

1. Set the HANDLE AUDIO switch to ON.

The built-in microphone of the camera is activated when the HANDLE AUDIO switch is set to OFF.

Connecting an external audio device

You can use a microphone (sold separately) or an external audio device, such as an audio mixer, for recording.

1. Connect your desired device to the INPUT1, INPUT2, or INPUT3 jack.

When using either the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, connect the device to the INPUT1 jack.
When connecting the device to the INPUT3 jack, proceed to Step 3.

2. Select an audio source to input.

Depending on the device connected to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or
INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch as follows:

LINE (standard input level of +4 dBu (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)): for an external audio device (e.g. an audio mixer)
MIC: for a dynamic microphone or a microphone with the built-in battery
MIC+48V: for a microphone compatible with +48V power (phantom power)

3. With the INPUT SELECT switch, select the audio input for recording audio to the channels on the camera.
Select the audio input jack on the XLR adaptor (INPUT1, INPUT2, or INPUT3) through which audio is recorded to
the channels on the camera.

4. When the device is connected to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the standard input level of the microphone.
When the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch is set to either “MIC” or
“MIC+48V,” you can set the standard input level with the ATT (INPUT1) or ATT (INPUT2) switch. Select the level
suitable for the sensitivity of the connected microphone or for the volume level of the input audio.
0dB: Standard input level of -60 dBu
This is suitable for recording with a low-sensitivity microphone while amplifying sounds.
10dB: Standard input level of -50 dBu
This is the recommended input level for an ordinary microphone.
20dB: Standard input level of -40 dBu
This is suitable for recording with a high-sensitivity microphone while keeping the sound volume low.

5. Adjust the recording volume level.

319
Minimizing noise with the low-cut function
Minimize unwanted noises, such as wind noise, air-conditioning noise, and vibration noise, by attenuating low-frequency
components of the audio input from the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack.

1. Change the LOW CUT (INPUT1) or LOW CUT (INPUT2) switch setting.
Select either “300Hz” or “100Hz” depending on the noise to minimize.

Adjusting the recording volume level

You can adjust the recording volume level of the audio input from the INPUT1, INPUT2, or INPUT3 jack.

1. Set the AUTO/MAN(/LINK) switch for the audio input jack (INPUT1/INPUT2/INPUT3) to “MAN.”
2. Rotate the AUDIO LEVEL dial to adjust the volume to the appropriate level.
Make sure that the volume is at the appropriate level by monitoring the audio recording volume with the
connected headphones or the volume level meter on the camera.

Hint
To automatically adjust the recording volume level, set the AUTO/MAN(/LINK) switch to “AUTO.” If the input audio is loud, the
recording volume level will be lowered automatically to avoid audio distortion.

To automatically synchronize the adjustment of the recording volume level of the audio input from the INPUT2 jack to the INPUT1
jack, set the AUTO/MAN/LINK (INPUT2) switch to “LINK.” This synchronization comes in handy for receiving audio through the
INPUT1 and INPUT2 jacks and recording the audio in stereo. Setting the AUTO/MAN (INPUT1) switch to “MAN” and the
AUTO/MAN/LINK (INPUT2) switch to “LINK” disables the AUDIO LEVEL dial for the INPUT2 jack. This allows you to adjust the
recording volume levels of the audio input from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 jacks simultaneously with the AUDIO LEVEL dial
for the INPUT1 jack.

Selecting the audio input for recording audio to the channels on the camera
With the INPUT SELECT switch, select the audio input jack on the XLR adaptor (INPUT1, INPUT2, or INPUT3) through
which audio is recorded to the channels on the camera.

When only the INPUT1 jack has an external device connected:

Set the switch to “IN1.” Audio input from the INPUT1 jack will be recorded to both the CH1 and CH2 channels on the
camera.

Audio input jack Recording channel

INPUT1 CH1 and CH2

When both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 jacks have an external device connected:
Set the switch to “IN1·IN2.” Audio input from the INPUT1 jack will be recorded to the CH1 channel on the camera, while
audio input from the INPUT2 jack will be recorded to the CH2 channel.

Audio input jack Recording channel

INPUT1 CH1

INPUT2 CH2

Hint

320
 When using a stereo microphone with two XLR (3-pin, female-type) plugs, connect the left-channel plug to the INPUT1 jack and
the right-channel plug to the INPUT2 jack, and then set the INPUT SELECT switch to “IN1·IN2.”
In addition, setting the AUTO/MAN/LINK (INPUT2) switch to “LINK” comes in handy during stereo recording, as you can
simultaneously adjust the recording volume levels of the audio input from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 jacks.

When the INPUT3 jack has an external device connected:

Set the switch to “IN3.” Stereo audio will be received through the INPUT3 jack, and left-channel audio will be recorded to
the CH1 channel on the camera, while right-channel audio will be recorded to the CH2 channel.

Audio input jack Recording channel

INPUT3 (L) CH1

INPUT3 (R) CH2

When the INPUT1, INPUT2, and INPUT3 jacks all have an external device connected for simultaneous recording
to 4 channels
To record audio input from the INPUT1 jack to the CH1 channel, audio input from the INPUT2 jack to the CH2 channel,
and audio input from the INPUT3 jack to the CH3 and CH4 channels on the camera, set the switch to “IN1·IN2.”

Audio input jack Recording channel

INPUT1 CH1

INPUT2 CH2

INPUT3 (L) CH3

INPUT3 (R) CH4

To record audio input from the INPUT3 jack to the CH1 and CH2 channels, audio input from the INPUT1 jack to the CH3
channel, and audio input from the INPUT2 jack to the CH4 channel on the camera, set the switch to “IN3.”

Audio input jack Recording channel

INPUT1 CH3

INPUT2 CH4

INPUT3 (L) CH1

INPUT3 (R) CH2

Note
If dust or water droplets are present on the surface of the microphone, successful recording may not be possible. Be sure to
clean the microphone surface before using the handle.

While recording is in progress, operating and handling noises from the camera or lens may be recorded. Touching the handle
while recording is in progress will cause noise to the recording.

If the microphone on the handle is in proximity to a speaker, acoustic feedback may occur. In this case, move the handle away
from the speaker to allow the maximum distance between the microphone and the speaker, or lower the speaker volume.

When a micro USB cable is connected to the handle, using the XLR adaptor may affect its performance.

Use of the XLR adaptor in the vicinity of a radio tower may cause static noise in recordings. Before camera shooting, make sure
that there is no radio tower nearby.

321
 Even when the HANDLE AUDIO switch is set to ON, audio from the XLR adaptor cannot be recorded while an external
microphone is connected to the camera.

You cannot adjust the recording volume level for external audio devices connected to the XLR adaptor.

While recording is in progress, do not change the INPUT1 or INPUT2 switch settings.

Before connecting/disconnecting an external microphone or device to/from the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, be sure to set the
INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch to a position other than “MIC+48V.” Plugging/unplugging
the cable into/from the external microphone or device while the switch is set to “MIC+48V” may cause loud noise or a malfunction
of the device.

Before attaching/removing a microphone (sold separately) to/from the adaptor, be sure to set the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V)
switch to a position other than “MIC+48V.” While the switch is set to “MIC+48V,” plugging/unplugging the cable into/from the
microphone may cause a loud noise or a malfunction of the microphone.

If there is noticeable noise coming from the jacks with no device connected to them, set the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or
INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch to “LINE.”

When the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch is set to “LINE,” the standard input level is
locked to +4 dBu. The standard input level will not change according to the ATT switch setting.

Related Topic
XLR handle unit
Attaching the supplied XLR handle unit

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

322
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

TC/UB

The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Time Code Preset:
Sets the time code.
User Bit Preset:
Sets the user bit.
Time Code Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
Time Code Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
Time Code Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
User Bit Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

How to set the time code (Time Code Preset)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [59.94p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.29
* When [23.98p]/[24.00p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 00 to 23 frames.
When [50p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.24

3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.
How to reset the time code

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Preset].

2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00.00).

How to set the user bit (User Bit Preset)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [User Bit Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.

How to reset the user bit

323
1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [User Bit Preset].
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).

How to select the recording method for the time code (Time Code Format *1)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Format].

DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.

The setting is fixed to [-] when recording in 23.98p/24.00p.

How to select the count up format for the time code (Time Code Run)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Run].

Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.

When the recording format is changed.

When the recording medium is removed.

How to select how the time code is recorded (Time Code Make)

1. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Make].

Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in the [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [Time Code
Run] setting.
The time code is read from the memory card in the slot designated by [ Recording Media] under [ Rec. Media
Settings]. When [ Recording Media] is set to [Simult. Recording], the time code is read from the memory card in Slot
1.

How to match the time code with other devices

Connect to another device such as a camcorder using an adapter cable (sold separately), and then set [Time Code
Make] to [Preset] and [Time Code Run] to [Free Run]. For details, refer to “Matching the time code with other devices.”

Related Topic

324
TC/UB Disp. Setting
Matching the time code with other devices

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

325
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

TC/UB Disp. Setting

Sets the display of the recording time counter, time code (TC), and user bit (UB) for movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [TC/UB Disp. Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Counter:
Displays the time counter of movie recording.
TC:
Displays the time code.
U-Bit:
Displays the user bit.

Related Topic
TC/UB

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

326
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Matching the time code with other devices

You can match the time code with devices equipped with a time code output terminal, such as camcorders, by
connecting the camera and the device. A dedicated adapter cable (sold separately) is required to connect the Multi/Micro
USB terminal of the camera to the BNC output terminal of a commercially available BNC cable.

About the dedicated adapter cable (sold separately)

You can convert the BNC terminal to a Micro USB terminal with an adapter cable (sold separately). The availability of the
adapter cable may vary depending on the country or region. Refer to the following support site for inventory confirmation
and purchase. When purchasing, please let us know the product name and product number.

Sony service facility for professional products

https://www.sony.net/SonyInfo/Support/

Product name: Adapter cable VMC-BNCM1 (sold separately)

Product number: A-5051-506-A
Length: 0.2 m (0.6 ft)

Preparation in advance

Set the time code output device (camcorder, etc.) to the mode in which the time code always advances (Free Run or
Clock).

To match the time code

1. Press the MODE (mode) button on the camera. Then, select [Movie] to set the camera to the movie shooting mode.

2. MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → Set [Time Code Make] to [Preset] and [Time Code Run] to [Free Run].

3. Connect the BNC output terminal of the BNC cable (A) to the Multi/Micro USB terminal of the camera with the
adapter cable (B).

The time code of the camera will synchronize with the time code of the connected device (external lock state), and
“EXT-LK” will appear on the screen.
Once the external lock state has been set for approximately 10 seconds, it will be maintained even after the device
on the time code output side is disconnected.

Hint

327
 The external lock state of the time code is released when you perform the following operations on the camera.
When you change the setting for [Time Code Make] or [Time Code Run]
When you change the time code with [Time Code Preset]
When you change the shooting mode to the slow-motion/quick-motion mode

Note
The adapter cable VMC-BNCM1 (sold separately) can only be used with this camera body. Do not connect it to the Micro USB
terminal of other devices.

You cannot use the adapter cable by connecting it to the Micro USB terminal of the XLR handle unit (supplied).

When connecting the adapter cable to the camera, be careful not to apply excessive force to the Micro USB terminal of the
adapter cable.

When you set the camera to the external lock status, the time code is instantly locked to the external time code, and the same
value as the external time code appears on the time data display. However, do not start recording for a few seconds until the time
code generator stabilizes.

If the frequency of the reference time code and the frame frequency of the camera are not the same, the time code cannot be
locked correctly and the camera will not operate normally. In this case, the time code also cannot be properly locked to the
external time code.

When you match the time code of the camera with that of another device, movies may be off by one frame. If you use the camera
for a long time, the deviation from the reference time code may increase.

Related Topic
TC/UB

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

328
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Contents of this chapter

The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Customizing the camera”). From each item
name, you can jump to the page describing the respective functions.

Customization features of the camera

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Registering and recalling camera settings

Camera Set. Memory
Recall Camera Setting
Memory/Recall Media
Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

Registering frequently used functions to the function menu

Fn Menu Settings

Registering frequently used functions to My Menu

Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu

Separately adjusting the camera settings for still images and movies
Different Set for Still/Mv

Customizing the functions of the ring/dial

Av/Tv Rotate
Function Ring(Lens)
Lock Operation Parts

Recording movies by pressing the shutter button

REC w/ Shutter (movie)

Monitor settings
Monitor Flip Direction
DISP (Screen Disp) Set

329
5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

330
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Customization features of the camera

The camera has various customization features such as registration of functions and shooting settings to custom keys.
You can combine your preferred settings to customize the camera for easier operation.
For details on how to configure the settings and use them, refer to the page for each function.

To assign frequently used functions to buttons ( Custom Key/Dial Set., Custom Key/Dial Set.,
and Custom Key Setting)
You can change the functions of the buttons including the Custom Buttons (1 to 6) according to your preferences. It is
recommended that you assign frequently used functions to easily operable buttons so that you can call up the assigned
functions simply by pressing the corresponding button.

To register frequently used functions to the Fn button (Function menu)

If you register functions frequently used in the shooting mode to the Function menu, you can display the registered
functions on the screen simply by pressing the Fn (Function) button. On the Function menu screen, you can recall the
function you want to use by selecting the icons.

To combine frequently used functions on the menu screen ( My Menu)

If you combine the frequently used items from menus such as the shooting and network menu on the “My Menu” screen,
you can quickly access the desired menu items.

331
To assign different functions to the dial and switch the function of the dial ( My Dial Settings )
You can assign the desired functions to the front/rear dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings to the camera as “My Dial 1 - 3” settings.

Example: [My Dial Settings] screen for models with a front dial, rear dial L, and rear dial R

To change the shooting settings quickly according to the scene ( Camera Set. Memory)
You can register the appropriate shooting settings* for scene to the camera or a memory card, and call up the settings
easily by using the MODE (Mode) button.
* You cannot register custom key settings.

To save the customized camera settings to a memory card (Save/Load Settings)

You can save camera settings* to a memory card using [Save/Load Settings]. This function is useful when you want to
back up the settings, or to import the settings to another camera of the same model, etc.
* Some settings cannot be saved on a memory card.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Using the function menu
Add Item
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Camera Set. Memory
Save/Load Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

332
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable buttons and
dials. This lets you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly.

You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode, movie shooting mode, and
playback mode.

Assignable functions vary depending on the buttons or dials.

You can assign functions to the following buttons and dials.

1. Custom Button 2
2. Custom Button 3
3. Custom Button 1
4. Front dial
5. Custom Button 6
6. MOVIE Button
7. Multi-Slc Center Btn
8. Rear dial
9. Custom Button 5
10. Fn Button
11. Center Button
12. Control Wheel/Left Button/Right Button/Down Button
13. Custom Button 4

The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the 5 button (Custom button 5).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.].

If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]. If you want to
assign a function to recall while playing back images, select [ Custom Key Setting].
You can also select [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] and [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] from MENU → (Setup) →
[Dial Customize].

333
 2 Move to the [Rear] screen using the top/bottom side of the control wheel. Then, select [Custom Button 5]
and press the center of the control wheel.

3 Select [Eye AF] using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the center.

If you press the 5 button (Custom button 5) while shooting and eyes are detected, [Eye AF] will activate and the
camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the 5 button (Custom button 5).

To use different functions for the dials/wheel depending on the shooting mode
If you add a check mark to [Separate M mode and other modes.] when assigning functions to the dials/wheel, you can
assign different functions for [Manual Exposure] and the other exposure modes ([Intelligent Auto]/[Program
Auto]/[Aperture Priority]/[Shutter Priority]).
If you add a check mark to [Separate Flexible Exp. and Intelligent Auto.] when assigning functions with [ Custom
Key/Dial Set.], you can assign different functions for [Flexible Exp. Mode] and [Intelligent Auto].

Hint
You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold
button.

Related Topic
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Fn Menu Settings
Using the function menu

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

334
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

You can assign the desired functions to the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel, and register up to three combinations
of settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key
you assigned in advance.

Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through
[My Dial 3].

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [My Dial Settings].

2. Select a dial or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.
3. Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel.

Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.

4. After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.

If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.

Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] →
Select the key that you want to use to recall “My Dial.”
2. Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”

Menu item details

My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:
While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the dial/wheel.
My Dial 1→2→3 :
Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1
→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”
Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:
The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again
to return to the normal function.

Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning
the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel.

335
In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is assigned to the
1 button (Custom button 1).

Operation part My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3

Control wheel ISO White Balance Not set

Front dial Aperture Creative Look Move AF Frame : Std

Rear dial Shutter Speed Exposure Comp. Move AF Frame : Std

1. Press the 1 button (Custom button 1).

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.

The icons for the functions registered to [My Dial 1] are displayed in the lower part of the screen.

2. Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, turn the front dial to set the aperture value, and turn the rear dial to set
the shutter speed.
3. Press the 1 button (Custom button 1) again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control
wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.
4. Turn the control wheel to set [ White Balance], turn the front dial to set [ Creative Look], and turn the rear dial
to set [ Exposure Comp.].
5. Press the 1 button (Custom button 1) again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].
Note
“My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also
skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].

Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Lock Operation Parts] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is
recalled.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

336
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Camera Set. Memory

Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the
memory card. You can recall the settings using just the MODE (Mode) button.

1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.

2 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Camera Set. Memory] → desired number.

3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed

To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.

When registering the settings on a memory card, only a memory card that has been selected using [ Memory/Recall Media]
can be used.

Program Shift cannot be registered.

Related Topic
Recall Camera Setting
Memory/Recall Media

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

337
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Recall Camera Setting

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling your preferred shooting settings registered with [ Camera Set. Memory].

1 MODE (Mode) button → Select MR1, MR2, or MR3 ( Recall Camera Setting) → Press the center of the
control wheel.

To recall settings registered to the memory card, select MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [
Recall Camera Setting] and select the desired number.

Hint
If you recall settings registered to the memory card, the settings are recalled from the memory card in the slot specified in [
Memory/Recall Media]. You can confirm the memory card slot by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [
Memory/Recall Media].

Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.

Note
If you set [ Recall Camera Setting] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the
original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.

Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory
Memory/Recall Media

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

338
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Memory/Recall Media

Selects the memory card slot from which settings are recalled or to which settings are registered for M1 through M4.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Memory/Recall Media] → desired slot.

Menu item details

Slot 1:
Selects the slot 1.
Slot 2:
Selects the slot 2.

Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory
Recall Camera Setting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

339
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and
temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and
release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] → Select a registration number
from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].

The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.

2 Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you
want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.

A (check) mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.

To cancel a selection, press the center again.

3 Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and
press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.

Select [Import Current Setting] to register the current settings of the camera to the registration number that you
chose.

4 Select [Register].

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Exposure
Focus setting
Drive mode (other than self-timer)

To recall registered settings

1. MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → Select the desired key and then
select one of the registration numbers from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].
2. On the shooting screen, press the shutter button while holding down the key to which you assigned one of the
registration numbers.
The registered settings are activated while you are holding down the custom key.
Hint
You can change the settings for [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] after assigning one of the registration numbers to the custom key using
[ Custom Key/Dial Set.].

Note

340
 The registration numbers [Recall Custom hold 1] through [Recall Custom hold 3] are available only when the shooting mode is
set to P/A/S/M.

Depending on the attached lens and the status of the camera when the registered setting recall is executed, the registered
settings may not take effect.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

341
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Fn Menu Settings

The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button in the shooting mode.
You can register 12 functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.

The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [ Grid Line Display].

To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → select [Fn Menu Settings].

2 Select (Drive Mode) from among the 12 still image function menu items using the
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the center.

3 Move to the screen showing [ Grid Line Display] using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then,
select [ Grid Line Display] and press the center of the control wheel.

( Grid Line Display) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the Function
menu.

Hint
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], you can also open [Fn Menu Settings] by holding down the icon in the function menu.

Related Topic
Using the function menu

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

342
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Add Item

You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Add Item].

2 Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.

3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Hint
You can add up to 42 items to (My Menu).

Note
You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
Any item under MENU → (Playback)

Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
Using the menu

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

343
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Sort Item

You can rearrange the menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Sort Item].

2 Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Related Topic
Add Item

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

344
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Delete Item

You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Item].

2 Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.

Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Page].

You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete All].

Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

345
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Delete Page

You can delete all the menu items added to a page under (My Menu) in MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Page].

2 Select a page that you want to delete using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.

Related Topic
Delete All
Add Item

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

346
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Delete All

You can delete all the menu items added to (My Menu) in MENU.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete All].

2 Select [OK].

Related Topic
Delete Page
Add Item

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

347
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Display From My Menu

You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.

1 MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.

Related Topic
Add Item
Using the menu

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

348
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Different Set for Still/Mv

For each item in still image shooting and movie recording, you can select whether to use a common setting or separate
settings.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → Select [Different Set for Still/Mv].

The operation guide screen will appear. Select [OK] to display the setting screen.

2 Add check marks to the items that you want to set separately for still image shooting and movie recording,
and then select [OK].

You can set the following items separately for still image shooting and movie recording.

Aperture
Shutter Speed
ISO
Exposure Comp.
Metering Mode
White Balance
Picture Profile
Focus Mode

Hint
When you switch from a common setting to separate settings with [Different Set for Still/Mv], the current settings are applied to
both still image shooting and movie recording. However, the custom white balance setting is only applied to still image shooting.

When you switch from separate settings to a common setting with [Different Set for Still/Mv], the setting values of items return to
their initial values. As an exception, the setting values for still image shooting are applied to the aperture value, shutter speed,
and custom white balance settings.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

349
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Av/Tv Rotate

Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter
speed.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Does not change the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.
Reverse:
Reverses the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

350
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Function Ring(Lens)

You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing
(power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with
compatible lenses).

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the lens.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Function Ring(Lens)]→ desired setting.

Menu item details

Power Focus:
The focusing position moves toward infinity when you turn the function ring to the right. The focusing position moves to
the closer range when you turn the function ring to the left.
/Full Frame:
The angle of view switches between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm when the function ring is turned.
The angle of view switches regardless of the direction in which you turn the function ring.

Related Topic
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

351
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Lock Operation Parts

You can set whether the multi-selector, dials, and wheel can be locked by pressing and holding down the Fn (Function)
button.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Lock Operation Parts] → desired setting.

To lock the operating parts, hold down the Fn (Function) button until the message “Locked.” appears on the
monitor.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not lock the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, or control wheel even if you press and hold down the Fn (Function)
button.
Multi-Selector Only:
Locks the multi-selector.
Dial + Wheel:
Locks the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.
All:
Locks the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.

Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

You can lock all buttons, dials, and wheels except the shutter button by pressing and holding the MENU button and the Fn
(Function) button simultaneously for 5 seconds. Press and hold the MENU button and the Fn button simultaneously for 5 seconds
again to release the lock.

Note
If you set [AF Area Registration] to [On], [Lock Operation Parts] will be fixed to [Off].

Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

352
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

REC w/ Shutter (movie)

You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button instead of the REC (recording) button.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ REC w/ Shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.

Hint
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [REC Control].

Note
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.

Related Topic
Shooting movies

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

353
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Monitor Flip Direction

The direction of image and menu screen displays can be inverted according to how the monitor is opened and the
orientation of the monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor] → [Monitor Flip Direction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Inverts the direction of the display of the monitor by detecting how the monitor is opened and the orientation of the
monitor.
Horizontal Flip:
Flips the display of the monitor horizontally when shooting.
180 Degree Flip:
Rotates the display of the monitor 180 degrees for all kinds of displays such as images and menu screens.
No Flip:
Does not invert the display of the monitor.

Hint
By repeatedly pressing the key to which the [Switch Monitor Flip Disp] function is assigned, you can switch the setting in the
order of [Horizontal Flip] → [180 Degree Flip] → [No Flip] → [Horizontal Flip]. When [Monitor Flip Direction] is set to [Auto], the
display method is temporarily switched while the setting value remains [Auto].

Note
Even if [Monitor Flip Direction] is set to [Horizontal Flip], the direction of the monitor display during playback will not be inverted.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

354
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

DISP (Screen Disp) Set

Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] → desired setting → [Enter].

The items marked with (check) are available.

Menu item details

Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green.

Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.

The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.

Related Topic
Using the DISP (Display Setting) button

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

355
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Contents of this chapter

The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Viewing”). From each item name, you can
jump to the page describing the respective functions.

Viewing images
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)
Playing back still images
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Playing back movies
Volume Settings
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Cont. Play for Interval
Play Speed for Interval

Changing how images are displayed

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Display as Group
Focus Frame Display (playback)
Disp Specified Time Img.

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Protecting recorded images (Protect)

Adding information to images

Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Rotating an image (Rotate)

Extracting still images from a movie

Photo Capture
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture)

Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)

Deleting images
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete pressing twice
Delete confirm.

356
Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

357
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Selects a slot that contains a memory card.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Select Playback Media] → desired slot.

Menu item details

Slot 1:
Selects the slot 1.
Slot 2:
Selects the slot 2.

Note
When you select [Date View] in [View Mode], the camera only plays back images from a memory card selected using [Select
Playback Media].

Related Topic
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

358
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Playing back still images

Plays back the recorded images.

1 Select MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Select Playback Media] to choose which memory
card slot to play back.

2 Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.

3 Select the image with the control wheel.

Images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are displayed as one group. To play back the images
in the group, press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB].

If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon indicating that data is being
written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions are not available.

When [ Focus Frame Display] is set to [On], the focus frame at the time of shooting is displayed over played-back images.
The focus frame that the camera used to focus during shooting is displayed in green. Even if multiple focus frames are displayed
during shooting, only the one on which the camera actually tried to focus will be displayed during playback.

Related Topic
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)
Display as Group
Focus Frame Display (playback)
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

359
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.

1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side.

Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side to adjust the zoom scale.
By rotating the front/rear dial, you can switch to the previous or next image while keeping the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.

2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.

3 Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.

Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.

You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU → (Playback) →
[Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].

You can also enlarge the image by touching the monitor. Drag the monitor to move the enlarged position. Set [Touch Operation]
to [On] beforehand.

Note
You cannot enlarge movies.

Related Topic
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Touch Operation
Touch operations on the monitor

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

360
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after the enlarged display
screen is closed.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Position

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

361
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Enlarge Initial Position

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.

Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

362
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the camera detects the vertical and horizontal directions, and displays the image being
played back according to the orientation.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.

Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally during movie playback.

Related Topic
Rotating an image (Rotate)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

363
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Playing back movies

Plays back the recorded movies.

1 Select the slot of the memory card to be played back from MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] →
[Select Playback Media].

2 Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.

3 Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of the control wheel to
start playback.

Available operations during movie playback

You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side of the control wheel.

: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
: Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Photo Capture
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel

Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB].

“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the previous frame” are available
during pause.

Movie files recorded using other products may not be playable on this camera.

For movies with Shot Marks, the positions of the Shot Marks are displayed on the playback bar during movie playback. In
addition, the Shot Mark icon is displayed on the screen when a scene to which a Shot Mark was added is played back.

You can jump to the positions of Shot Marks by turning the rear dial while paused.

Note
Even if you shoot the movie vertically, the movie will be displayed horizontally on the screen of the camera.

364
Related Topic
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

365
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Volume Settings

Sets the sound volume for movie playback.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.

Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

366
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)

Sets the audio to be monitored by the device connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera when you record
movie audio in 4 channels or when playing back a movie recorded in 4 channels.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [ 4ch Audio Monitoring] → desired setting.

Menu item details

CH1/CH2:
Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
CH3/CH4:
Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.
CH1+3/CH2+4:
Outputs the mixed audio of channel 1 and channel 3 to the L (left) side and the mixed audio of channel 2 and channel 4
to the R (right) side.
CH1/CH1:
Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.
CH2/CH2:
Outputs audio from channel 2 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.

Note
The [ 4ch Audio Monitoring] settings are enabled during movie recording when the XLR handle unit (supplied) or an accessory
for 4-channel audio recording is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera and the camera is set to record 4-channel
audio.

The camera cannot output audio in 4 channels to the device connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera.

When outputting audio through the speakers of the camera, the channels will also change depending on the [ 4ch Audio
Monitoring] setting.

Related Topic
Shoe Audio Set.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

367
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Automatically plays back images continuously.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Slide Show] → desired setting.

2 Select [Enter].

Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow
when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.

Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.

You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

368
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Cont. Play for Interval

Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge
Desktop(Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Cont. Play for Interval].

2 Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.

You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.

You can change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the
playback speed by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Play Speed for Interval].

You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.

Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
Play Speed for Interval
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

369
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Play Speed for Interval

Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. Play for Interval].

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Play Speed for Interval] → desired setting.

Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during [Cont. Play for Interval].

Related Topic
Cont. Play for Interval

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

370
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.

1 Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side while the image is being played back.

2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.

To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Image Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

9 Images/25 Images

To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.

To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.

Related Topic
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

371
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Sets the View Mode (image display method).

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [View Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
Movie View:
Displays only movies by date.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

372
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Display as Group

Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Display as Group] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays images as a group.
To play back the images in a group, select the group and press the center of the control wheel.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.

Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)

On the image index screen, (Display as Group) icon is displayed over the group.

Note
If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.

Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Interval Shoot Func.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

373
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Focus Frame Display (playback)

Sets whether or not to display a focus frame around the area where the camera focused when you play back a still
image.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [ Focus Frame Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not display a focus frame during playback.
On:
Displays a focus frame in green during playback.

Hint
Even if multiple focus frames are displayed at the time of shooting, only the one indicating where the camera actually focused will
be displayed during playback.

Even if a focus frame is displayed around the face of the subject at the time of shooting, the focus frame will be displayed around
the eye during playback when an eye is detected.

Note
A focus frame will not be displayed over the following images.
Still images shot with manual focus
Movies
Still images created with [Photo Capture]

The focus frame is displayed only on the single-image playback screen. The focus frame is not displayed on the image index
screen or over enlarged images.

The focus frame is not displayed during auto reviewing.

If you shoot an image with a different composition after performing auto-focusing, the focus frame will appear offset from the
subject.

Even if the focus frame is displayed, it may not be in focus to the subject.

Even if you turn off the focusing frame display while shooting using the [AF Area Auto Clear] or [AF-C Area Display] function,
when [ Focus Frame Display] is set to [On], the focusing frame will be displayed during playback.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

374
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Disp Specified Time Img.

You can play back images by specifying the shooting date and time.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Disp Specified Time Img.].

2 Set the date and time of the image to be played back using the control wheel, and then press the center.

The image shot on the specified date and time will be played back.

If there are no images shot on the specified date and time, the image shot on the closest date and time will be
played back.

Note
When [Disp Specified Time Img.] is performed while playing back images in a group, the image shot on the closest date and time
in the group is played back.

For movies, the date and time when the recording was started are treated as the shooting date and time.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

375
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Sets the method of jumping between playback images for the front dial and rear dial, respectively.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Image Jump Setting] → Select the dial for which you
would like to change the setting, and then select the desired setting.

Menu item details

One by one - By 100 images:
Jumps in units of the specified number of images.
By 3 minutes/By 5 minutes/By 10 minutes/By 30 minutes/By 1 hour/By 3 hours/By 6 hours/By 12 hours/By 24
hours:
Jumps between images by the specified time unit based on the shooting date and time of the images.
Protect Only:
Plays back only protected images.
Rating Only:
Plays back all rated images.
Rating Only ( ) - Rating Only ( ):
Plays back only images for which a rating ( to ) has been specified.
W/O Rating Only:
Plays back only images that are not rated.
Shot Mark Only:
Sets the image jump target only to images with Shot Marks.
Shot Mark1 Only/Shot Mark2 Only:
Sets the image jump target only to images with the specified Shot Mark.
No Shot Mark:
Sets the image jump target only to images without Shot Marks.
Divider Frame Only:
Sets the image jump target only to divider frames.
Image After Divider:
Sets the image jump target only to images next to divider frames.

To add a Shot Mark to a movie

If you add a Shot Mark while recording a movie, you can use it as a mark for selecting, transferring, or editing the movie.
Assign [Add Shot Mark1] / [Add Shot Mark2] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] and press the custom
key while recording a movie.

You can also add a Shot Mark during movie playback by assigning [Add/Delete Shot Mark1] / [Add/Delete Shot
Mark2] to the desired key with [ Custom Key Setting] and pressing the custom key.

To create a divider frame

By creating a divider frame between sessions of shooting, you can use it as a mark when selecting images.
Assign [Create Divider Frame] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance and press the custom key
when you want to create a divider frame.

376
 Note
When [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images] is selected, one group is counted as one image.

Related Topic
Rating
Protecting recorded images (Protect)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

377
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Protecting recorded images (Protect)

Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The (protect) mark is displayed on protected images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Protect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in
the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the (check) mark.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.

Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key
Setting], you can protect images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

378
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Rating

You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale of the number of stars ( - ) to make it easier to find images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Rating].

The image rating selection screen will appear.

2 Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.

3 Select the level of (Rating) by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the
center.

4 Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.

To set ratings when shooting still images

Assign [Add Rating ( )] through [Add Rating ( )] to the desired keys using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance
and press the custom keys after shooting a still image. You can set the rating for the last shot still image.

Ratings cannot be set when shooting movies.

Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key Setting] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a
rating. The level of (Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.

By specifying ratings with the [Image Jump Setting] function, you can quickly find the desired image.

Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

379
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Sets the available number of (rating) when rating (ranking) images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating]
using [ Custom Key Setting].

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].

2 Add a (check) mark to the number of (rating) that you want to activate.

You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.

Related Topic
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

380
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.

1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Rotate].

2 Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.

Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor of the camera.

You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.

When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the
software.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

381
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.

2 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Photo Capture].

3 Play back the movie and pause it.

4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.

5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.

The scene is saved as a still image.

Hint
With [ JPEG/HEIF Switch], you can select either JPEG or HEIF as the recording file format for still images.

Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

382
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture)

Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) for still images captured with [Photo Capture].
You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format has high compression efficiency. The
camera can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format. Depending on the computer or
software, you may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible environment is required to play
back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by connecting the camera and the TV via
HDMI.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ JPEG/HEIF Switch] → desired setting.

Menu item details

JPEG:
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the JPEG format. This setting gives priority to compatibility.
HEIF(4:2:0):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:0) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality and compression efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:2):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:2) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality.

Note
HEIF image files recorded with this camera cannot be displayed on other cameras that do not support the HEIF file format. Be
careful not to accidentally erase HEIF image files by formatting the memory card or deleting the files.

Related Topic
Photo Capture

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

383
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)

You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Select Playback Media] to a memory card in
another slot.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Copy].

All of the contents with a date or in a folder currently being played back will be copied to a memory card in another
slot.

Hint
You can select the type of images to be displayed by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [View Mode].

Note
If images in a group are copied, the copied images will not be displayed as a group on the destination memory card.

If protected images are copied, the protection will be canceled on the destination memory card.

It may take a long time when many images are to be copied. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

To copy a movie, the destination memory card must support the recording format of the movie. If the movie cannot be copied, a
message will be displayed on the monitor of the camera.

Related Topic
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

384
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete] → desired setting.

Menu item details

All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
All Images in This Group:
Deletes all images in the selected group.
Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the (check) mark.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.

Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.

To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
Move the W/T (zoom) lever to W side → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date
using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.

The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

Related Topic
Display as Group
Using the Delete button
Format

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

385
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Delete pressing twice

Sets whether or not you can delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice in
sequence.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [ Delete pressing twice] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Enables you to delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice.
Off:
Does not enable you to delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

386
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

387
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and a TV equipped with an HDMI
jack are required. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.

1 Turn off both this product and the TV.

2 Connect the HDMI terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an HDMI cable (sold
separately).

Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI Type-A terminal of the product and the HDMI jack of the TV.

3 Turn on the TV and switch the input.

4 Turn on this product.

Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.

5 Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the (Playback) button.

Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not output video or audio.

Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.

388
When [Time Code Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set
[Time Code Output] to [Off].

If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Resolution]
→ [2160p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.

During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or change the movie to a different
frame rate or different color mode, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control, select MENU → (Setup) → [External
Output] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

389
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [Format] → desired memory card slot.

2 Select [Enter]. (Quick formatting)

If you press the (Delete) button, a message to perform full formatting will be displayed. You can launch full
formatting by selecting [Enter].

The difference between quick formatting and full formatting

Perform full formatting when you feel like the speed of recording to the memory card or read-out from the memory card
has become slow, or when you want to erase data completely, etc.
Full formatting takes longer than quick formatting, because all areas of the memory card are initialized.

Hint
You can also display the screen for formatting the memory card by pressing and holding the MENU button and then the
(Delete) button on the shooting screen for approximately two seconds.

You can cancel full formatting before it is completed. Even if you cancel full formatting in the middle of the process, the data will
be erased, so you can use the memory card as is.

Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).

The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.

Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.

It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.

You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

390
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)

Selects the memory card slot to record still images. In the default settings, [Slot 1] is selected. If you want to use one
memory card without changing the setting, use Slot 1.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] → [ Recording Media] → desired

setting.

Menu item details

Slot 1:
Records still images on the memory card in Slot 1.
Slot 2:
Records still images on the memory card in Slot 2.
Simult. Recording:
Simultaneously records still images on the memory cards in Slot 1 and Slot 2.
Sort Recording:
Records still images with different file formats and image sizes by sorting them to different slots.
Set the file format and image size of still images for each slot.

Related Topic
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

391
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)

Selects the memory card slot to record movies. In the default settings, [Slot 1] is selected. If you want to use one
memory card without changing the setting, use Slot 1.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] →[ Recording Media] → desired

setting.

Menu item details

Slot 1:
Records movies on the memory card in Slot 1.
Slot 2:
Records movies on the memory card in Slot 2.
Simult. Recording:
Simultaneously records movies on the memory cards in Slot 1 and Slot 2.

Related Topic
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

392
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media

If a memory card in use becomes full or you have forgotten to insert a memory card into a slot, you can record images to
the other memory card.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] → [Auto Switch Media] → desired
setting.

Menu item details

On:
The camera automatically starts recording on the other memory card when a memory card in use becomes full or if you
have forgotten to insert a memory card.
Off:
The camera does not perform [Auto Switch Media].

How the camera switches the memory card slot in use

When recording both still images and movies on a single memory card:
When images cannot be recorded to the memory card in use, the settings for [ Recording Media] and [ Recording
Media] change automatically and images are recorded to the other memory card.
When the other memory card becomes full after switching, the camera starts recording in the former slot again.

Example: When [ Recording Media] and [ Recording Media] under [ Rec. Media Settings] are both set to [Slot
1]

: Recording images
(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).
(B): The memory card is replaced with a recordable one.

When recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards:

[ Recording Media] or [ Recording Media] under [ Rec. Media Settings] is set to [Simult. Recording].

After either of the memory cards becomes full, images are recorded to the other card.
When you replace the full memory card with a recordable memory card, the camera is once again able to simultaneously
record images with the selected setting.

393
Example: [ Recording Media] and [ Recording Media] are both set to [Simult. Recording]

: Simultaneous recording is available.

: The same image cannot be recorded simultaneously.
(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).
(B): A recordable memory card is inserted.

When recording images separately to two memory cards in the RAW and JPEG/HEIF formats:

When [ Recording Media] under [ Rec. Media Settings] is set to [Sort Recording]

When either of the memory cards becomes full, the camera starts recording to the other memory card in both the RAW
and JPEG/HEIF formats.
When you replace the full memory card with a recordable memory card, the camera is once again able to record the two
types of images separately with the selected setting.

Example: When [ File Format] for Slot 1 is set to [RAW] and [ File Format] for Slot 2 is set to [JPEG]

: Images are sorted by the file format.

: Images cannot be sorted.
(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).
(B): A recordable memory card is inserted.
Hint
Images are recorded to the memory card in the slot displayed on the monitor with an arrow symbol. After the camera switches the
slot using [Auto Switch Media], replace the memory card in the former slot with a recordable memory card.

When recording both still images and movies on a single memory card, the settings for [ Recording Media] and [ Recording
Media] change automatically as the slot switches. If you want to record on the slot in use before switching, select the desired slot
with [ Recording Media]/[ Recording Media].

If you want to record with the settings with [ Recording Media] and [ Recording Media], set [Auto Switch Media] to [Off].

394
Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Recordable movie times
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

395
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. Also, if you use a memory card in the camera after using it in
another device, the images on the memory card may not be played back correctly. For example, the images may not be
displayed as a group. If these problems happen, repair the file using [ Recover Image DB].
Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [ Recover Image DB].

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB] → desired memory card slot → [Enter].

Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

396
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Display Media Info. (still image/movie)

Displays the recordable number of still images and the remaining recording time for movies on the memory card.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Display Media Info.] → desired memory card slot.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

397
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

File/Folder Settings

Configure settings related to the folder and file name of the still image to be shot.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Forced File Number Reset:
Resets the still image file number and creates a new folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + any 5 characters”. Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10020405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2022)

Hint
The settings for [File Number] and [Set File Name] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.

When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you
switch the setting for [ Rec. Media Settings] → [ Recording Media] between Slot 1 and 2.

When [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form], the last 5 characters of the folder name can be set using [Create New Folder].

You can also change the last five characters of the folder name by using [Forced File Number Reset].

Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.

The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.

Related Topic
Create New Folder
File Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

398
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Select REC Folder

If [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the
folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Select REC Folder] → desired folder.

Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].

If the camera is set to record images to memory cards in both slots, you may only select a common folder on both memory cards.
If there is no common folder, you can make one using [Create New Folder].

Related Topic
File/Folder Settings
Create New Folder

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

399
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Create New Folder

Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one
greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.
Up to 4 000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be
automatically created.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Create New Folder].

Hint
You can set the last 5 characters of the folder name.

Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be
automatically created.

If the camera is set to record images to memory cards in both slots, a new folder will be created on both memory cards. A new
folder number will be one greater than the largest existing folder number on the two memory cards.

If the camera is set to record images to memory cards in both slots and an image is shot, a new folder may be automatically
created.

You cannot change the folder name when [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].

Related Topic
File/Folder Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

400
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

File Settings

Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [File Settings] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names. You can change the beginning of the file name to your desired character
string or set the file name to the [Cam ID + Reel#] format.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Cam ID + Reel#]*: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Camera ID+Reel number+Camera position+File
number+Date+Random string.” Example: A001C001_230101AB
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Cam ID + Reel# Settings*:
Sets the various parts of the file name when [File Name Format] is set to [Cam ID + Reel#].
[Camera ID]: The ID of the camera for shooting (A to Z)
[Reel Number]: The reel number of the movie (001-999)
[Camera Position]: The camera position when shooting (C/L/R). When the file number reaches 999, the recorded camera
position changes, but the setting value (C/L/R) does not change. Example: C999→D001
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].
* When the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later

Hint
The settings for [File Number] and [File Name Format] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.

When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you
switch the setting for [ Rec. Media Settings] → [ Recording Media] between Slot 1 and 2.

Note
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.

Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] or [Cam ID + Reel# Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is
made.

[Reel Number] is reset when the [Camera ID] setting has changed. [Reel Number] will not be reset even if you execute [Reset]
under [File Number].

You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.

401
 If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].

If you insert a memory card used with [File Name Format] set to one of the following into another device, the memory card may
not function properly.
[Cam ID + Reel#]
[Title]
[Date + Title]
[Title + Date]

If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”

When you set [File Name Format] to [Cam ID + Reel#], use a CFexpress Type A memory card or SDXC memory card.

Related Topic
File/Folder Settings
Display File Name (movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

402
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Display File Name (movie)

Sets whether to display the file name of the movie while shooting. The file name of a movie to be shot will be displayed in
the shooting standby mode.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Display File Name] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the file name on the movie recording screen.
Off:
Does not display the file name on the movie recording screen.

Related Topic
File Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

403
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

IPTC Information

You can write IPTC information* when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the IPTC Metadata
Preset (https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/) and write the information to a memory card beforehand.
* IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [IPTC Information] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Write IPTC Info:
Sets whether to write IPTC information to still images. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], the (IPTC) icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Register IPTC Info :

Registers IPTC information from a memory card to the camera. Select [Slot 1] or [Slot 2] as the memory card from which
to read out IPTC information.

Hint
When you play back images that have IPTC information, the (IPTC) icon appears on the screen.

For details on how to use the IPTC Metadata Preset, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/

Note
Whenever you register IPTC information, information previously registered to the camera is overwritten.

You cannot edit or check IPTC information on the camera.

To delete IPTC information registered to the camera, reset the camera to the initial settings.

Before lending out or handing over the camera, reset the camera to delete IPTC information.

Related Topic
Setting Reset

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

404
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Copyright Info

Writes copyright information onto the still images.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.

2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your
desired name.

You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter
up to 46 letters.

Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], a (Copyright) icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.

Note
A (Copyright) icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.

In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns
before lending out or handing over your camera.

Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].

Related Topic
Using the keyboard

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

405
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Write Serial Number (still image/movie)

Writes the camera's serial number when shooting.

1 MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [ Write Serial Number] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Writes the camera's serial number to the image.
Off:
Does not write the camera's serial number to the image.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

406
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Wi-Fi Connect

Sets whether to use the Wi-Fi function of the camera.

This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.4.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Connect] → desired setting.

Set this function to [On] to search for connectable access points.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the Wi-Fi function.
Off:
Does not use the Wi-Fi function.

Related Topic
WPS Push
Access Point Set.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

407
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

WPS Push

If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or
contact the administrator of the access point.
Set [Wi-Fi Connect] to [On] in advance.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [WPS Push].

2 Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.

Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-
Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is WEP or WPA3 only or your access point does not support the
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].

A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.

Related Topic
Access Point Set.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

408
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
Set [Wi-Fi Connect] to [On] in advance.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Access Point Set.].

2 Select the access point you want to register.

When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.

If you select [Manual Registration], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.
If you select [WPS PIN], you can register the access point by entering the PIN code displayed on the camera
into the connected device.

3 Input the password, and select [OK].

Access points without (Lock mark) do not require a password.

Note that unmasking your password risks revealing your password to a third party. Make sure that no one is
around before unmasking.

4 Select [OK].

Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.

409
For an unregistered access point, select the [Detail] button on the password entry screen.
For a registered access point, press the right side of the control wheel on the access point selection screen.

Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Hint
When you select a registered access point, [Priority Connection] for that access point becomes set to [On], prioritizing
connections to that access point.

The prioritized access point is marked with a (crown) icon.

Note
Once an access point is registered, [Priority Connection] for that access point is set to [On]. If you want to stop preferentially
connecting to a certain access point, set [Priority Connection] for the access point to [Off].

If there are both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz access points with the same SSID and encryption format, the access point with the stronger
radio field will be displayed.

Related Topic
WPS Push
Using the keyboard

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

410
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Wi-Fi Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. [5GHz] has faster communication speeds and more stable data
transfers than [2.4GHz].
The [Wi-Fi Frequency Band] setting applies to a Wi-Fi Direct connection with a smartphone or computer, which is a direct
connection to the camera not via an access point.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Frequency Band] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2.4GHz/5GHz

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

411
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Display Wi-Fi Info.

Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].

Hint
Information other than the MAC address is displayed when [Wi-Fi Connect] is set to [On].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

412
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

SSID/PW Reset

This product shares connection information with devices that have permission to connect when establishing a Wi-Fi
Direct connection with a smartphone or a computer. If you want to change which devices have permission to connect,
reset the connection information.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].

Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.

If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the
settings of the computer.

Related Topic
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

413
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Bluetooth Settings

Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander or shooting grip via a
Bluetooth connection.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.

Menu item details

Bluetooth Function:
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera. ([On]/[Off])
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Manage Paired Device:
Enables you to check or delete the pairing information for devices paired with the camera.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl:
Sets whether or not to use a Bluetooth compatible remote commander (sold separately). ([On]/[Off])
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.

Note
After you delete the pairing information for the camera from your smartphone, delete pairing information for the smartphone from
the camera using [Manage Paired Device].

Related Topic
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

414
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth compatible remote commander (sold separately) or shooting grip (sold
separately).

1 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].

2 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].

If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 3 will
appear.

3 On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Pairing] to display the screen for pairing.

4 On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.

5 On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.

Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].

Menu item details

On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.

Icons displayed when connecting to a Bluetooth remote commander

(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the Bluetooth remote commander is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the Bluetooth remote commander is not established.

Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired Bluetooth remote commander.

The following functions cannot be used when [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].

415
 Infrared remote commander
Power-saving mode

If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Ensure that the camera is either not connected to any other device or connected to only one device using Bluetooth
communication. (Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time.)
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
If the function does not work properly even after you have performed the above operations, delete the pairing information for
the device that you want to connect using [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.

Related Topic
Bluetooth Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

416
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Wired LAN (USB-LAN)

Configures a wired LAN. You can connect this product to a network via wired LAN by connecting a commercially
available USB-LAN conversion adaptor to the USB Type-C terminal on the product.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Wired LAN] → desired setting.

Menu item details

IP Address Setting:
Sets whether to configure the IP address for the wired LAN automatically or manually. ([Auto]/[Manual])
Display Wired LAN Info.:
Displays wired LAN information for this product such as the MAC address or IP address.

IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the fixed address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [ IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Hint
We recommend that you use a gigabit ethernet adaptor for USB Type-C connections.

Note
Not all types of USB-LAN conversion adaptors are guaranteed to operate properly.

Related Topic
Using the keyboard

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

417
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

USB-LAN/Tethering

Connects to the network by connecting a USB-LAN conversion adaptor to the camera or uses a tethering connection on
your smartphone to connect to the network.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.4.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Network) → [USB-LAN/Tethering] → desired connection method.

To disconnect from the network, select [USB-LAN Disconnection] or [Tethering Disconnection].

Menu item details

USB-LAN Connection:
Connects to the network using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor.
Tethering Connection:
Connects to the network using your smartphone’s tethering connection.

Related Topic
Wired LAN (USB-LAN)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

418
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Airplane Mode

When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.

If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

419
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Edit Device Name

You can change the device name for Wi-Fi Direct, [PC Remote], or Bluetooth connections.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Edit Device Name].

2 Select the input box, then input the device name → [OK].

Related Topic
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
Using the keyboard

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

420
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card. Use this function for encrypted communications
during FTP transfer.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp_2210/h_zz/

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Import Root Certificate].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

421
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Access Authen. Settings

Encrypts communications between the camera and device when remotely shooting or transferring images using a
smartphone, or when connecting via the PC remote function.
This function can be used when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen. Settings] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Access Authen.:
Sets whether to encrypt communication with access authentication. ([On] / [Off])
User:
Sets the username for access authentication.
Password:
Sets the password for access authentication.
Generate Password:
Automatically generates a password for access authentication.

Note
When [Access Authen.] is set to [Off], communication is performed without SSH connection authentication or encryption, so the
content may be intercepted, or the camera may be accessed by an unintended third party.

Before connecting the camera to a smartphone or computer, make sure that [Access Authen.] is not unintentionally set to [Off].

The username and password for [Access Authen. Settings] are automatically generated and set when the camera is purchased.
When setting your own username and password, be careful not to be intercepted by others.

For the password in [Access Authen. Settings], set a character string that is long enough that it is difficult for others to guess, and
keep it securely.

If you unmask your password when entering it, there is a risk that it will be revealed to a third party. Make sure that no one is
around before unmasking.

Initialize the camera before lending or giving it to others.

For [User], set a string of alphanumeric characters/symbols of 16 characters or less.

For [Password], set a string of alphanumeric characters/symbols of 8 to 16 characters including both letters and numerals.

Related Topic
Access Authen. Info
Using the keyboard

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

422
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Access Authen. Info

Displays the information required when connecting the camera to a computer or smartphone using access
authentication.
This function can be used when the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen. Info].

The information required to connect such as the username, password, MAC address, and fingerprint of this camera
are displayed.

Note
When displaying [Access Authen. Info] on the screen, make sure that no one is around to avoid the information on the screen
being seen by others and to prevent unauthorized use of usernames, passwords, and fingerprints.

Initialize the camera before lending or giving it to others.

Related Topic
Access Authen. Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

423
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Security(IPsec)

Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a wired LAN or Wi-Fi connection.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Security(IPsec)] → desired setting.

Menu item details

IPsec:
Sets whether or not the [Security(IPsec)] function is used. ([On]/[Off])
Dest. IP Address:
Sets the IP address of the device to connect using the [Security(IPsec)] function.
Shared Key:
Sets the shared key used by the [Security(IPsec)] function.

Note
Use at least eight and no more than 20 alphanumeric characters or symbols for [Shared Key].

When you enter the shared key, note that unmasking the shared key risks revealing it to a third party. Make sure that no one is
around before unmasking.

For IPsec communications, the device to connect must be compatible with IPsec.
Depending on the device, communications may not be possible or the communication speed may be slow.

On this camera, IPsec operates in transport mode only and uses IKEv2.
The algorithms are AES with 128-bit keys in CBC mode/Diffie-Hellman 3072-bit modp group/PRF-HMAC-SHA-256/HMAC-SHA-
384-192.
The authentication expires after 24 hours.

Encrypted communications can only be made with devices that are configured correctly. Communications with other devices are
not encrypted.

For details on the IPsec configuration, consult the administrator of the network for your device.

The [Security(IPsec)] function cannot be used when [Access Authen.] under [Access Authen. Settings] is set to [On].

Related Topic
Using the keyboard

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

424
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Reset Network Set.

Resets all the network settings to default settings.

1 MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

425
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

FTP Transfer Func.

You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP
servers is required.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp_2210/h_zz/

1 MENU → (Network) → [FTP Transfer] → [FTP Transfer Func.] → desired setting.

Related Topic
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

426
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Monitor Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor] → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

427
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Power Save Start Time

Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent
wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button
halfway down.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off/30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec

Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.

The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:

While power is being supplied via USB
While playing back slideshows
During FTP transfer
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
While [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On]
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

428
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].

Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.

Continuous recording time for movies when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording is as follows when the camera starts recording with the
default settings after the power has been turned off for a while. The following values indicate the continuous time from
when the camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.

Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 120 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 90 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 90 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 90 minutes
HD: XAVC S HD (59.94p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a CFexpress
Type A memory card; when the monitor is open)
4K: XAVC S 4K (59.94p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a
CFexpress Type A memory card; when the monitor is open)

Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.

Related Topic
Recordable movie times

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

429
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Fan Control (movie)

Sets the control method for the cooling fan, which keeps the temperature of the camera from rising.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [ Fan Control] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Operates the cooling fan automatically based on the internal temperature of the camera.
Minimum:
Operates the cooling fan while suppressing operating sounds, unless the internal temperature of the camera exceeds a
certain temperature.
Off in Rec:
Does not operate the cooling fan while recording movies, unless the internal temperature of the camera exceeds a
certain temperature. The fan rotates at the maximum speed when not recording.
Always Off:
Does not operate the cooling fan.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

430
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Display Quality

You can change the display quality.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor] → [Display Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.

Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.

When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

431
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

USB Connection Mode

Selects the USB connection method when the camera is connected to a computer, etc.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Connection Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Sel. When Connect:
Each time you connect the USB cable to the camera, select the mode you want to use from the following. ([Image
Transfer (MSC)], [Image Transfer (MTP)] or [Remote Shoot (PC Remote)])
MassStorage(MSC):
Establishes a Mass Storage connection when connecting the camera to a computer, etc.
When you connect the camera to a computer or other USB device, the camera is recognized as a removable disk, and
you can transfer files on the camera.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between the camera, a computer, and other USB devices.
When you connect the camera to a computer or other USB device, the camera is recognized as a media device, and you
can transfer still images/movies on the camera.
The memory card in memory card slot 1 is the connection target.

PC Remote:
Uses Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) to control the product from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.

Related Topic
Importing images to the computer
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

432
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

USB LUN Setting

Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

433
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

USB Power Supply

Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.

Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.

Operation Available / Unavailable

Shooting images Available

Playing back images Available

Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections Available

Charging a battery pack Unavailable

Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted Unavailable

Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.

This product cannot be powered via the Multi/Micro USB terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

434
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

HDMI Resolution

When you connect the camera to a TV or monitor device using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select the
resolution to be output from the HDMI terminal of the camera during still image shooting or playback.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The camera automatically recognizes the resolution of the connected TV or output device and sets the output resolution
accordingly.
2160p:
Outputs signals in 2160p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

Note
If images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select [1080i], [1080p], or [2160p] based on the connected TV.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

435
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

HDMI Output Settings (movie)

Sets the video and audio to be output to an external recorder/player connected via HDMI when shooting a movie.
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable (sold separately) to output 4K movies or RAW movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Output Settings] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Rec. Media dur HDMI Output:
Sets whether or not to record movies on the memory card of the camera during HDMI output.
[On]: Records movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs the movies to the HDMI-connected device at the
same time. The color depth for the output movie is based on [Record Setting] under [ Movie Settings].
[Off(HDMI Only)]: Does not record movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs movies only to devices
connected via HDMI.
Output Resolution:
Sets the resolution of the image that will be output to another device connected via HDMI when [Rec. Media dur HDMI
Output] is set to [On] and [RAW Output] is set to [Off]. ([Auto] / [2160p] / [1080p] / [1080i])
4K Output Set.(HDMI Only):
Sets the frame rate and color depth of 4K movie output to another device connected via HDMI when [Rec. Media dur
HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)] and [RAW Output] is set to [Off]. ([59.94p 10bit] / [50p 10bit] / [29.97p 10bit] /
[25p 10bit] / [23.98p 10bit] / [24.00p 10bit])
RAW Output:
Sets whether or not to output RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. ([On] / [Off])
RAW Output Setting:
Sets the frame rate when outputting RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. ([59.94p] /
[50p] / [29.97p] / [25p] / [23.98p] / [24.00p])
Time Code Output:
Sets whether or not to output the time code and user bit to another device connected via HDMI. ([On] / [Off])
Time code information is transmitted as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can
then refer to the digital data in order to recognize the time data.
REC Control:
Sets whether to start or stop recording on the external recorder/player remotely by operating the camera when the
camera is connected to an external recorder/player. ([On] / [Off])
4ch Audio Output:
When recording audio in 4 channels, set the combination of audio channels that will be output to other devices
connected via HDMI.
[CH1/CH2]: Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
[CH3/CH4]: Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.

Hint
With [REC Control] set to [On], (STBY) is displayed when a recording command is ready to be sent to the external
recorder/player, and (REC) is displayed when a recording command is being sent to the external recorder/player.

Even when playing back a movie with 4 channels on a device connected to the HDMI terminal of the camera, the audio is output
with the [4ch Audio Output] setting.

When outputting RAW movies to another device connected via HDMI, set [Log Shooting] under [Log Shooting Setting] to a
setting other than [Off]. The setting for [Color Gamut] under [Log Shooting Setting] is applied to RAW movies output via HDMI.

436
Note
RAW movies cannot be recorded on the memory card of the camera.

During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is locked to [On] and [RAW Output] is locked to [Off]. It
is not possible to only output 4K movies to a device connected via HDMI without recording the movies on a memory card. It is
also not possible to output RAW movies.

When [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)] or the camera outputs RAW movies, [HDMI Info. Display]
becomes temporarily set to [Off].

When [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)], the counter does not move forward (the actual recording time is
not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recorder/player.

When [Log Shooting] under [Log Shooting Setting] is set to [Off], [RAW Output] is locked to [Off].

Regardless of the [Output Resolution] setting, the HDMI output resolution becomes 1080 in the following cases.*
When [Log Shooting] under [Log Shooting Setting] is set to other than [Off].
When [ Picture Profile] is set to PPLUT1-PPLUT4.

* However, when [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)] or [RAW Output] is set to [On], movies are output in 4K.

[REC Control] can be used with external recorders/players that support the [REC Control] function.

When [Time Code Output] is set to [Off], you cannot set [REC Control].

Even when (REC) is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of
the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.

When [Time Code Output] is set to [On], images may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In this case, set [Time
Code Output] to [Off].

It is not possible to output audio in 4 channels to other devices connected via HDMI.

The gamma is locked to S-Log3 during RAW output. You can reproduce contrast equivalent to that of the normal gamma by
setting [Gamma Display Assist] to [On] and [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] to [Auto] or [S-Log3→709(800%)].

While outputting RAW movies, you cannot use [Active] for [ SteadyShot].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

437
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

HDMI Info. Display

Selects whether or not to display shooting information on a TV or a monitor device when the camera and TV, etc. are
connected via an HDMI cable (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and shooting information are displayed on the
camera’s monitor.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

438
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

CTRL FOR HDMI

When connecting this product to a TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate this product by aiming the
TV remote control at the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.

2 Connect this product to a TV.

The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.

The operation method differs depending on the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the TV.

Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control, set [CTRL FOR HDMI] to [Off].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

439
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [ Language] → desired language.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

440
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Area/Date/Time Setting

You can set the area (where you are using the camera), daylight savings ([On]/[Off]), the date display format, and the
date and time.
The Area/Date/Time setting screen will be displayed automatically if you did not register your smartphone in the initial
setup or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu to set the date and time
after the first time.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [Area/Date/Time Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Area Setting:
Sets the area where you are using the camera.
Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On] / [Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date display format.

Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.

Related Topic
Performing initial setup for the camera

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

441
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

442
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Audio signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Audio signals] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.

Hint
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], [Audio signals] becomes locked to [Off].

Note
If [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

443
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

REC Lamp

Sets whether to turn on the recording lamps during movie recording.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [REC Lamp] → desired setting.

Menu item details

All On:
Turns on all recording lamps.
Only Front Off:
Does not turn on the recording lamp on the front side, but turns on the recording lamp on the rear side and the REC
(recording) button.
All Off:
Does not turn on any of the recording lamps.

Hint
Change the recording lamp settings when there is an object that reflects light, such as glass, in the direction of shooting.

The REC (recording) button on the top lights up along with the recording lamp on the rear side.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

444
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Video Light Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Power Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY:
The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto:
The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

445
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

IR Remote Ctrl

You can operate the camera using a Infrared Remote Commander (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [IR Remote Ctrl] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Allows infrared remote commander operation.
Off:
Does not allow infrared remote commander operation.

Note
The lens or lens hood may block the infrared remote sensor that receive the signals. Use the infrared remote commander in the
position from which the signal can reach the product.

When [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On], the product does not switch to power save mode. Set [Off] after using an infrared remote
commander.

An infrared remote commander cannot be used while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

446
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Auto Pixel Mapping

Sets whether or not to automatically optimize the image sensor (pixel mapping). Normally, set this function to [On].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Auto Pixel Mapping] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Performs pixel mapping automatically at regular intervals when you turn off the camera.
During this time, shutter sounds will be produced.
Off:
Does not perform pixel mapping automatically.

Hint
If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [Off], perform [Pixel Mapping] regularly. We recommend that you perform the operation once
every three days.

Note
If [Pixel Mapping] is not performed regularly, bright spots may appear in recorded images.

Related Topic
Pixel Mapping
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

447
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Pixel Mapping

You can manually optimize the image sensor (pixel mapping). If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [Off], perform [Pixel
Mapping] regularly according to the following procedure. We recommend that you perform the operation once every
three days.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → select [Pixel Mapping].

2 Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.

Pixel mapping will be performed.

The camera cannot be operated during pixel mapping.

The camera will restart when pixel mapping is complete.

Hint
When you turn the camera on, a message to perform pixel mapping will occasionally be displayed. If the message is displayed,
perform [Pixel Mapping].

If you see bright spots in a recorded image on the camera monitor, immediately perform [Pixel Mapping].

Note
Pixel mapping cannot be performed when the battery is low.

If [Pixel Mapping] is not performed regularly, bright spots may appear in recorded images.

Related Topic
Auto Pixel Mapping

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

448
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Version

Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.
The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is
attached.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Version].

Note
Updating can be performed only when the remaining battery level is 51% or more. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

449
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Display Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the camera.

This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.4.00 or later.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Display Serial Number].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

450
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Save/Load Settings

You can save/load camera settings to/from a memory card or to/from the cloud (C3 Portal). You can also load settings
from another camera of the same model.
Saving/loading a setting file to/from the cloud can be performed when the camera’s system software (firmware) is
Ver.4.00 or later.
A service contract is required to use C3 Portal.

If you want to use the cloud to save/load a setting file, connect the camera to the smartphone application Creators’ App
for enterprise in advance.
For details on Creators’ App for enterprise, refer to the following website.
https://helpguide.sony.net/promobile/c3p_app/v1/en/index.html

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Save/Load Settings] → desired item.

When you perform [Load] or [Save], select [Media]/[Cloud(Private)]/[Cloud(Share)] as the loading source or
save destination of the setting file.

Menu item details

Load:
Loads settings from a memory card or from the cloud to this camera.
Save:
Saves the current settings of this camera to a memory card or to the cloud.
Delete:
Deletes the settings saved on a memory card.

Settings that cannot be saved

The following setting parameters cannot be saved using the [Save/Load Settings] function. (Menu items without setting
parameters, such as, [Focus Magnifier], are not listed.)

(Shooting)
IPTC Information
Copyright Info

(Exposure/Color)
External Flash Set.
White Balance: Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3

(Focus)
Face Memory

(Network)
FTP Transfer Func.*
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Frequency Band

451
 IP Address Setting
Edit Device Name
Import Root Certificate
Access Authen. Settings**
Security(IPsec)
* You can save or load settings under [FTP Transfer Func.] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [FTP Transfer] → [FTP Transfer Func.] →
[Save/Load FTP Settings]. For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp_2210/h_zz/
** When the camera's system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later.

(Setup)
Area/Date/Time Setting
Note
You can save up to 10 settings per memory card. When 10 settings have been already saved, you cannot perform [Save New].
Delete the existing settings using [Delete], or overwrite them.

You can save up to 60 settings in C3 Portal. When 60 settings have been already saved, you cannot perform [Save New].
Overwrite the existing settings or use C3 Portal to delete them.

Only Slot 1 is used for saving or loading data. You cannot change the saving/loading destination slot.

You cannot load settings from a camera of a different model.

Even if the model name is the same, settings from a camera with a different system software version may fail to load.

You can use this function to save settings registered to [ Camera Set. Memory]. However, [Save/Load Settings] is
unavailable when the shooting mode is set to [ Recall Camera Setting]. Set the shooting mode to a mode other than MR (
Recall Camera Setting) before using this function.

Related Topic
C3 Portal

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

452
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Setting Reset

Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings. The setting values for both still image shooting and movie
recording are initialized.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.

Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.

The settings for [ Picture Profile] are not reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed, except the
settings for PPLUT 1 - 4.

The check mark for [Picture Profile] in [Different Set for Still/Mv] is not reset when you perform either [Camera Settings Reset] or
[Initialize].

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

453
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Functions available with a smartphone (Creators’ App)

Using the smartphone application Creators’ App, you can shoot an image while controlling the camera using a
smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to the smartphone.
Download and install the application Creators’ App from your smartphone’s application store. If Creators’ App is already
installed on your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Creators’ App, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/

Hint
You can also install Creators’ App by scanning the QR Code displayed on the screen of the camera using your smartphone.

Note
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to change without notice.

Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/mobile/

For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

454
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

C3 Portal

You can use the smartphone application Creators’ App for enterprise to load a setting file and LUT file from the cloud (C3
Portal) (when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.4.00 or later).
A service contract is required to use C3 Portal.

Download and install the application Creators’ App for enterprise from your smartphone's application store. If Creators’
App for enterprise is already installed on your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Creators’ App for enterprise, refer to the following website.
https://helpguide.sony.net/promobile/c3p_app/v1/en/index.html

Note
C3 Portal and Creators’ App for enterprise may only be available in certain countries and regions.

Related Topic
Manage User LUTs
Save/Load Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

455
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Monitor & Control

Monitor & Control is a smartphone application that supports monitoring and remote shooting functions required for movie
shooting.
Monitor & Control provides detailed live view and remote shooting controls by using the screen of your smartphone as a
monitor for movie shooting (when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.4.00 or later).

Download and install the application Monitor & Control from your smartphone's application store. If Monitor & Control is
already installed on your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Monitor & Control, refer to the following website.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/helpguide/ccmc/

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

456
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)

Connects the camera to your smartphone (pairing) to use the smartphone application Creators’ App.
This function can be used when the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver.3.00 or later.

If you did not connect the camera with your smartphone when you turned on the camera for the first time, perform the
following procedure.
The following is the procedure for connecting the camera to your smartphone when you install Creators’ App on your
smartphone for the first time.
: Operations performed on the smartphone
: Operations performed on the camera

1 : On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [Smartphone Connection]

2 : Follow the instructions on the screen and set [Bluetooth Function] to [On].

A screen for waiting for a connection from the app will appear.

If [Bluetooth Function] is already set to [On], the screen for waiting for a connection from the app will appear
immediately.

3 : Launch Creators’ App on your smartphone.

4 : Follow the instructions on the screen to pair the camera with your smartphone.

When the connection is completed, a menu to select a function for the camera appears on the smartphone.

5 : On the smartphone screen, select the desired function.

If you have used Creators’ App with other cameras

Launch Creators’ App after Step 2, open the [Cameras] screen, select the (Add Camera) button, and follow the
instructions on the screen to continue the operation.

About the icons when connecting to a smartphone

(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.
(Wi-Fi connection available): Wi-Fi connection with the smartphone is established.
(Wi-Fi connection unavailable): Wi-Fi connection with the smartphone is not established.

Connecting the camera and smartphone without pairing

If you want to connect without pairing, you need to perform the Wi-Fi connection operation every time.

1. On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [Smartphone Connection].

2. Press the (Delete) button on the camera to switch to the SSID and password screen.
457
3. Open the Wi-Fi setting screen on your smartphone.
4. On the Wi-Fi setting screen on your smartphone, select the SSID displayed on the camera and enter the password.
5. Launch Creators’ App on your smartphone and open the [Cameras] screen.
6. Select the (Setup) button in the upper right corner of the [Cameras] screen, and then select [Connect only via Wi-
Fi].
7. On the screen of Creators’ App on your smartphone, select the product name of the camera (ILME-FX3).
The smartphone will connect to the camera.

About one-touch connection with NFC

Although this camera is equipped with an NFC function, you cannot connect the camera to a smartphone using the NFC
function if the camera’s system software (firmware) is Ver2.0 or later.
Note
[Smartphone Connection] cannot be executed when [Airplane Mode] is set to [On].

Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time using Bluetooth communication.

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone.

Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators’ App)
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)
Reading location information from a smartphone

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

458
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Using a smartphone as a remote commander

With Creators’ App, you can shoot images while checking the shooting range of the camera on the screen of the
smartphone. Connect the camera and smartphone by referring to "Related Topic" at the bottom of this page. For details
on functions that can be operated from a smartphone, refer to the following support page
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/opr/

Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Remote Shoot Setting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

459
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Remote Shoot Setting

Configures settings for images saved when performing remote shooting using a smartphone or computer.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [Remote Shoot Setting] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the smartphone or the computer during remote shooting.
([Destination Only]/[Dest.+Camera]/[Camera Only])
Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred.
([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. ([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
RAW+H Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. ([RAW & HEIF]/[HEIF Only]/[RAW Only])

Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera].

When [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera] is selected for [Still Img. Save Dest.] and no memory card is inserted into the camera,
the shutter will not be released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot perform remote shooting using a smartphone or a computer.

[RAW+J Save Image] and [RAW+H Save Image] can be set only when [ File Format] under [Image Quality Settings] is set to
[RAW & JPEG] or [RAW & HEIF].

Related Topic
Using a smartphone as a remote commander

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

460
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)

You can transfer images to a smartphone by selecting images on the camera.

Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.

The following is the procedure for transferring the image currently displayed on the camera.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [ Select on Cam & Send] → [Size of Sending Image],
[RAW+J/H Send Target], and [ Sending Target] → desired setting.

2 Display the image to be transferred on the playback screen.

3 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [ Select on Cam & Send] → [ Send] → [This
Image].

You can also display the [ Send] screen by pressing the (Send to Smartphone) button.

4 Launch Creators’ App on your smartphone.

A message indicating that the transfer has started will appear.

5 Select [OK] on the smartphone.

The image will be transferred to the smartphone.

When the image is transferred, the (transferred) icon will appear on the screen of the camera.
You can transfer multiple images at once by selecting a setting other than [This Image] under [ Send].

Menu item details

Send:
Selects images and transfers them to a smartphone. ([This Image]/[All Images in This Group]/[All with this date]/[Filtered
Images]/[Multiple Images])
The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.
If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter].

Size of Sending Image:

Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent
JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J/H Send Target:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to a smartphone when the images are shot with [ File Format] under
[Image Quality Settings] set to [RAW & JPEG] or [RAW & HEIF]. ([JPEG & HEIF]/[RAW]/[RAW+J & RAW+H])
Sending Target:
Sets whether to transfer the low-bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie when transferring a movie to a
smartphone. ([Proxy Only]/[Original Only]/[Proxy & Original])
When you select [Proxy Only], movies can be transferred faster than when transferring the original movies.

461
To filter the images to be transferred (Filtered Images)
Images to be transferred can be filtered by the following conditions:

Target Group: [This Date]/[This Media]

Still Images/Movies: [All]/[Only Still Images]/[Only Movies]
Target Img (Rating): [ ]-[ ], [ ]
Target Movie ( ): [All]/[Only Shot Mark Mov.]
Target Img (Protect): [All]/[Only Protected Img.]
Transfer Status *: [All]/[Only Non-transfer]
* Images transferred by selecting them on the smartphone are treated as not yet transferred.

Note
For images transferred by selecting them on the smartphone, the (transferred) icon will not appear.

Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.

Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it
back on a smartphone.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Airplane Mode

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

462
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Reset Transfer Status (transferring to a smartphone)

You can reset the transfer status of images that have been transferred to your smartphone. Use this function if you want
to retransfer images that have previously been transferred. The transferred images will not be deleted even if you reset
the transfer status.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [ Reset Transfer Status].

If you press [OK] on the confirmation screen, all images that have been transferred to your smartphone will
become untransferred images.

Related Topic
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

463
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)

Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [ Cnct.
while Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the
camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [ Cnct. while Power OFF] → desired setting.

Menu Item Details

On :
Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [ Cnct. while Power
OFF], turn it off.
Off :
Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.

How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone

Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.

1. Set [ Cnct. while Power OFF] to [On].

2. Turn off the camera.
3. Launch Creators’ App on the smartphone.
4. Select [View and Import] on the smartphone.

The images saved on the memory card of the camera can be viewed and are ready to be transferred.

Note
If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [View and
Import] again on the smartphone.

When the camera is turned on, the camera will switch to the shooting screen, and the connection with the smartphone will be
terminated.

[ Cnct. while Power OFF] will be set to [Off] if you cancel pairing between the camera and the smartphone or pairing fails.

If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Ensure that the camera is either not connected to any other device or connected to only one device using Bluetooth
communication. (Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time.)
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
If the function does not work properly even after you have performed the above operations, delete the pairing information for
the device that you want to connect using [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.

Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators’ App)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)

464
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
Bluetooth Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

465
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Reading location information from a smartphone

You can use the application Creators’ App to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your
camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.
Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.

1 Launch Creators’ App on your smartphone, open the [Cameras] screen, and tap [Setup] → [Location
Information Linkage].

2 Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Creators’
App.

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
When you activate [Auto Time Correction] or [Auto Area Adjustment] on a linked smartphone, the camera
automatically corrects the date setting or area setting using information from the smartphone.

Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.

Hint
Location information can be linked when Creators’ App is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is off.
However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Creators’ App screen on the
smartphone.

When Creators’ App is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Creators’ App to resume location
information linking.

If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Ensure that the camera is either not connected to any other device or connected to only one device using Bluetooth
communication. (Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time.)
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Creators’ App.
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in the Bluetooth settings on your smartphone.
Delete the pairing information for your smartphone registered in [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. Before performing pairing again, first delete the pairing
information for the camera registered in the smartphone's Bluetooth settings and Creators’ App.

The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is
disconnected.

The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function
under [Setup] in Creators’ App on the smartphone that is already linked.

466
 If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.

The communication distance for the Bluetooth connection or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.

Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators’ App)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Bluetooth Settings

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

467
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Recommended computer environment

You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/pcenv/

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

468
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Connecting the camera to a computer

1 Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.

2 Turn on the camera and the computer.

3 (Setup) → [USB] → Set [USB Connection Mode] to [MassStorage(MSC)].

4 Connect the USB Type-C terminal on the camera to the computer with a USB cable.

When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for recognizing the camera may
start automatically on the computer. Wait until the procedure is finished.
If you connect the camera to your computer using the USB cable when [USB Power Supply] is set to [On],
power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting: [On])
Use the USB cable (supplied) or a USB-standard cable.
Use a SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2)-compatible computer and the USB cable (supplied) for higher-speed
communications.

Note
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Related Topic
Sides
USB Connection Mode
USB LUN Setting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

469
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Disconnecting the camera from the computer

Perform the following operations on the computer before disconnecting the camera from the computer.

1 Click (Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.

2 Click the displayed message.

The following operations are available after you have completed the steps above.
Disconnecting the USB cable.
Removing a memory card.
Turning off the camera.

Note
On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The camera will be disconnected
from the computer.

On some computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In this case, you can skip the steps above.

Do not remove the USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be damaged.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

470
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)

Imaging Edge Desktop

Imaging Edge Desktop is a software suite that includes functions such as remote shooting from a computer, and
adjusting or developing RAW images recorded with the camera.

For details on how to use Imaging Edge Desktop, refer to the support page.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/

Installing Imaging Edge Desktop on your computer

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/d/

Catalyst Browse (free software)/Catalyst Prepare (paid software)

Catalyst Browse is software for previewing clips. You can preview recorded XAVC S/XAVC HS clips, view and edit media
metadata, apply image stabilization* using metadata, apply color calibration, copy to the local hard drive, or transcode to
a variety of formats and so on with Catalyst Browse.
​Catalyst Prepare adds to the functions of Catalyst Browse allowing you to organize clips using bins, perform basic
timeline editing with storyboards, and so on.
* For the conditions of use of the image stabilization function, refer to the support page.

Installing Catalyst Browse/Catalyst Prepare on your computer

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

471
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Importing images to the computer

You can import images from the camera to a computer by connecting the camera to the computer with a USB cable, or
by inserting the memory card of the camera into the computer.
Open the folder in which the images you want to import are stored on the computer, and then copy the images to the
computer.

Example: Folder tree during USB Mass Storage connection

SD card

CFexpress Type A memory card

DCIM: still images

CLIP: movies
SUB: proxy movies

Note
Do not edit or otherwise process movie files/folders from the connected computer. Movie files may be damaged or become
unplayable. Do not delete movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not held liable for consequences resulting from
such operations via the computer.

If you delete images or perform other operations from the connected computer, the image database file may become
inconsistent. In this case, repair the image database file.

The folder tree is different during MTP connection.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

472
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.
When the camera and a smartphone are connected, you cannot control the camera from a computer. Make sure that the
camera is not connected to a smartphone beforehand.
For details on [PC Remote Function], refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/imagingedge/l/instruction/4_1_connection/index.php

The following is the procedure for connecting the camera to your computer using a Wi-Fi connection via a Wi-Fi access
point. If you will use another connection method, refer to “How to connect the camera and the computer using a method
other than a Wi-Fi access point.”

1 Select MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Connect] → [On] to connect the camera to the Wi-Fi
access point.

Connect the computer to the same Wi-Fi access point.

2 Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote] → [On].

3 Select [Access Authen. Info] to display the information such as the username, password, and fingerprint.

You can check the information by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen.
Info].

4 Launch Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer, and then enter and confirm the access
authentication information.

You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote).

Menu item details

PC Remote:
Sets whether or not to use the [PC Remote] function. ([On] / [Off])
Pairing:
When connecting via a Wi-Fi access point without using the [Access Authen.] function, pair the camera with the
computer.
Wi-Fi Direct Info.:
Displays information for connecting the computer and the camera via Wi-Fi Direct.

How to connect the camera and the computer using a method other than a Wi-Fi access point
When connecting with Wi-Fi Direct
Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.
Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [PC Remote Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the
Wi-Fi connection information (SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-
Fi connection information displayed on the camera. Then, continue the procedure from Step 3.
When connecting with a USB cable
Connect the USB Type-C terminal on the camera to the computer with a commercially available USB cable.

473
Next, select [Remote Shoot (PC Remote)] on the screen displayed on the camera.

Hint
In [Remote Shoot Setting] under [ Cnct./PC Remote], you can set the save destination and saved format of still images for PC
remote shooting.

When [Access Authen.] is set to [Off] and you are connecting via a Wi-Fi access point, you need to pair the camera with the
computer. Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [PC Remote Function] → [Pairing] after Step 1, and then
pair the camera and the computer using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer. Pairing information is deleted when
you initialize the camera.

Related Topic
Introduction to computer software (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
Remote Shoot Setting

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

474
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Remote Shoot Setting

Configures settings for images saved when performing remote shooting using a smartphone or computer.

1 MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./PC Remote] → [Remote Shoot Setting] → desired setting item.

Menu item details

Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the smartphone or the computer during remote shooting.
([Destination Only]/[Dest.+Camera]/[Camera Only])
Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred.
([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. ([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
RAW+H Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. ([RAW & HEIF]/[HEIF Only]/[RAW Only])

Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera].

When [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera] is selected for [Still Img. Save Dest.] and no memory card is inserted into the camera,
the shutter will not be released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot perform remote shooting using a smartphone or a computer.

[RAW+J Save Image] and [RAW+H Save Image] can be set only when [ File Format] under [Image Quality Settings] is set to
[RAW & JPEG] or [RAW & HEIF].

Related Topic
Using a smartphone as a remote commander

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

475
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Audio accessories compatible with the Multi Interface Shoe

If you shoot movies with an audio accessory (sold separately) attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, analog
or digital audio will be recorded via the Multi Interface Shoe.
If you use an audio accessory that supports the digital audio interface, the sound signals will be transmitted in a digital
format. This will allow you a wider range of recordable audio quality, such as the following.

High-quality audio recording with less deterioration

4-channel or 24-bit audio recording

The recordable audio quality differs depending on the audio accessory. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
audio accessory.

Hint
You can change the audio settings for audio accessories that support the digital audio interface using [ Shoe Audio Set.].

Note
Movies recorded with 24-bit audio may not be played back normally on devices or software incompatible with 24-bit audio,
resulting in unexpectedly loud volumes or no sound.

Related Topic
Shoe Audio Set.
HDMI Output Settings (movie)
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Audio Out Timing
Audio Recording

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

476
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Mount Adaptor

Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold separately) to this product.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

Note
You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor or auto-focus with certain lenses.

You cannot use the AF illuminator when using an A-mount lens.

The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Recording] → [Off].

It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on the lens used or the subject.

Related Topic
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

477
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following
functions are available.

Full frame shooting:

Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
Available with SAM/SSM lens only
AF system:
Phase Detection AF
AF/MF select:
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Automatic AF/Continuous AF/Direct manual focus (DMF)/Manual Focus

When using a Mount Adaptor in the movie mode, adjust the aperture value and the focus manually.

Available focus area:

[Wide]/[Zone]/[Center Fix]/[Spot]/[Expand Spot]/[Tracking]
SteadyShot:
In-body

Note
When a setting other than [Continuous Shooting: Lo] is selected for [Cont. Shooting], the focus is locked during the first shot,
even if [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

478
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are available.

Full size shooting:

Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
Not available.

Only the manual focusing mode is supported.

SteadyShot:
In-body

Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

479
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Multi Battery Adaptor Kit

You can use the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit (sold separately) with this camera to shoot for long periods. When using the
Multi Battery Adaptor Kit, remove the camera's battery cover.
For details, refer also to the operating instructions supplied with the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit.

To remove the battery cover

Pull the battery cover release lever (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the battery cover.

To attach the battery cover

Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by attaching
the shaft on the opposite side.

Note
While the plug-in plate of the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit is inserted in the camera, do not slide the battery lock lever of the camera.
The plug-in plate will be ejected from the camera if you do so.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

480
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Battery life and number of recordable images

Number of recordable images when shooting still images

Approx. 580 images

Battery life when shooting movies

Actual shooting of movies Approx. 95 min.

Continuous shooting of movies Approx. 135 min.

The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack has been fully
charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of use.
The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting with the default settings under the
following conditions:
Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Using a Sony CFexpress Type A memory card (sold separately)
Using a FE 28-70mm F3.5-5.6 OSS lens (sold separately)

The numbers of recordable still images are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)

One picture is taken every 30 seconds.

The power is turned on and off once every ten times.

The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:

The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 59.94p 50M /50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit.
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.
Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and ending shooting are performed.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

481
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Number of recordable images

When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on, the number of images that can be recorded
(should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.

Note
When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full. Replace the memory card with another
one, or delete images from the current memory card.

When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory card.

If the (Warning) icon or the (Malfunction) icon is displayed, there is something wrong with the memory card. Replace
the memory card with another one.

The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card

The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this
camera.
The numbers shown reflect the following conditions:

Using a Sony memory card

[Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2], and [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is set to [L: 12M]. *1

The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

(Unit: images)

SD memory card CFexpress Type A memory card

JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality/ File Format
64GB 128GB 80GB 160GB

JPEG Standard 15 000 30 000 17 000 35 000

JPEG Fine 11 000 22 000 12 000 25 000

JPEG Extra fine 6 000 12 000 7 000 14 000

HEIF Standard 21 000 43 000 25 000 48 000

HEIF Fine 16 000 33 000 19 000 38 000

HEIF Extra fine 12 000 24 000 13 000 28 000

RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)*2 2 600 5 300 3 000 6 100

RAW & HEIF (Compressed RAW)*2 2 800 5 700 3 300 6 700

RAW (Compressed RAW) 3 500 7 000 4 100 8 100

RAW & JPEG (Uncompressed RAW)*2 1 600 3 200 1 800 3 800

RAW & HEIF (Uncompressed RAW)*2 1 700 3 400 1 900 4 000

482
 SD memory card CFexpress Type A memory card
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality/ File Format
64GB 128GB 80GB 160GB

RAW (Uncompressed RAW) 1 900 3 800 2 200 4 400

*1 When [Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above. (except when [RAW] is
selected)
*2 JPEG image quality when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]
HEIF image quality when [RAW & HEIF] is selected: [Fine]

Note
Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9 999 images, “9999” will appear.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

483
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Recordable movie times

The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted with this camera. The
values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

(h (hour), min (minute))

CFexpress Type A memory

SD memory card
Rec Frame Record card
File Format
Rate Setting
64 GB 128 GB 80 GB 160 GB

1 h 10
200M 35 min 40 min 1 h 20 min
min

1 h 35
150M 45 min 50 min 1 h 40 min
min

2 h 10
XAVC HS 4K 59.94p/50p 100M 1 h 5 min 1 h 15 min 2 h 30 min
min

1 h 25 2 h 50
75M 1 h 35 min 3 h 10 min
min min

2 h 10 4 h 30
45M 2 h 20 min 4 h 50 min
min min

1 h 10
200M 35 min 40 min 1 h 20 min
min
XAVC S 4K 59.94p/50p
1 h 35
150M 45 min 50 min 1 h 40 min
min

4 h 10
50M 2h 2 h 10 min 4 h 30 min
min
XAVC S HD 59.94p/50p
3 h 20
25M 7h 3 h 30 min 7 h 10 min
min

59.94p 600M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min

XAVC S-I 4K
50p 500M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min

59.94p 222M 30 min 1 h 5 min 35 min 1 h 15 min

XAVC S-I HD
50p 185M 30 min 1 h 5 min 35 min 1 h 15 min

XAVC S-I DCI 59.94p 600M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min

4K* 50p 500M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min

The recording times when [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off].

* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

484
 The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.
The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on the file format/recording settings for movies,
memory card, ambient temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera before you start recording,
and condition of the charging of the battery.
The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting session is approximately 13 hours (a product
specification limit).

Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts
image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable
time is shorter because more memory is required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting
conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.

Notes on continuous movie recording

High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you
continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the
camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high
temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of the camera.
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when the camera records with the default settings after
the power has been turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous time from when the
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.

When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [Standard]

File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K

Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 30 minutes Approx. 30 minutes

Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 30 minutes Approx. 30 minutes

When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K

Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 120 minutes Approx. 90 minutes

Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 90 minutes Approx. 90 minutes

XAVC S HD: 59.94p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a CFexpress
Type A memory card; when the monitor is open
XAVC S 4K: 59.94p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a
CFexpress Type A memory card; when the monitor is open

The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record setting for movies,
Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you frequently recompose or
shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time
available will be shorter.
If the (Overheating warning) icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.
If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned off. Start
recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.
If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for longer periods of time.
Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.
485
 Turn the camera off when it is not being used.

Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Battery life and number of recordable images

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

486
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

List of icons on the screen for shooting movies

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.

1. Basic camera settings

Audio level

Audio recording off

Focus Mode

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.

S-log3 s709 709(800%) User1 LUT OFF
LUT
STBY REC
Movie recording standby/Movie recording in progress
1:00:12
Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)
4K HD D-4K*
File format of movies
* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

119.88p 100p 59.94p 50p 29.97p 25p 23.98p 24.00p

Frame rate of movies
NO CARD
Memory card status
1h 30m
Recordable time of movies

Writing data / Number of images left to write

Remaining battery

Remaining battery warning

487
 USB power supply
2. Exposure and other settings
1/250 1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5 F3.5
Aperture value

Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

ISO400 ISO 400
ISO sensitivity
800EI / 6.0E / L
Exposure Index/Base ISO
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)

AE lock/AWB lock

Shooting
3. Other settings (displayed during recording standby)

Shooting mode

Shooting mode ( Recall Camera Setting)

Tripod recognition

REC Control
*

4K/RAW/DCI 4K external output

* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

EXT-LK
External lock state of the time code
00:00:00.00
Time code (hours: minutes: seconds. frames)
00 00 00 00
User Bit
Spot Focus
Performing [Spot Focus]
x4 Slow x4 Quick
Slowness/quickness scale during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing

Audio format

Guide display for dials

Touch function in shooting mode (Touch focus/Touch tracking/off)

488
 Focus Cancel

Tracking Cancel

PC remote

FTP function / FTP transfer status

Airplane Mode

Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi

Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)

NFC active

Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable

Remote control

Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained

Metering Mode

D-Range Optimizer

Creative Look

Histogram

Digital level gauge

Overheating warning

Database file full / Database file error

Cooling fan malfunction warning

Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
List of icons on the playback screen

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

489
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

List of icons on the screen for shooting still images

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.

1. Shooting mode/Scene recognition

Shooting mode

Shooting mode ( Recall Camera Setting)

Scene Recognition icons

2. Camera settings
NO CARD
Memory card status
100
Remaining number of recordable images

Writing data / Number of images left to write

12M / 11M / 10M / 8M / 5.1M / 4.6M / 4.3M / 3.4M / 3.0M / 2.7M / 2.6M / 2M / 1.3M / 1.1M / 0.8M
Image size of still images

RAW recording (compressed/uncompressed)

J-X.FINE J-FINE J-STD H-X.FINE H-FINE H-STD
JPEG Quality / HEIF Quality
4:2:2
Color sampling for HEIF

Flash charge in progress

Setting Effect OFF

Exposure Effect (Exposure Setting Only)

AF Illuminator

Flickering detected

490
 SteadyShot off/on, Camera shake warning

SteadyShot focal length / Camera shake warning

Optical zoom only /Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

PC remote

Bright Monitoring

Silent mode

Remote control

FTP function / FTP transfer status

Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi

Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)

NFC active

Writing copyright information [On]

Writing IPTC information [On]

Touch function in shooting mode (Touch focus/Touch tracking/off)

Focus Cancel

Tracking Cancel

Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable

Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained

Airplane Mode

Overheating warning

Database file full / Database file error

Tripod recognition
3. Battery

Remaining battery

Remaining battery warning

USB power supply

4. Shooting settings

491
 Drive Mode

Flash Mode / Wireless Flash / Red Eye Reduction

±0.0
Flash Comp.

Focus Mode

Focus Area

Metering Mode
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)

D-Range Optimizer

Creative Look

Face/Eye Prior. in AF/ Face/Eye Subject

–
Picture Profile

Shutter Type

[ 1st Zoom Spd. ] under [ Zoom Lever Speed]

5. Focus indicator/exposure settings

Focus indicator
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value

Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

ISO400 ISO AUTO
ISO sensitivity

AE lock/FEL lock/AWB lock

Shooting
6. Guides/other
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing

Guide display for dials

Bracket indicator

Spot metering area

492
 Histogram

Digital level gauge

Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies
List of icons on the playback screen

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

493
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

List of icons on the playback screen

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.
Single-image playback

Histogram display

1. Basic information

Playback media

IPTC Information

Rating

Protect
3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode

NFC active

Remaining battery

Display as Group

Proxy movie included

494
 Shot Mark included

FTP transfer status

Smartphone transfer status (when using [ Select on Cam & Send])

2. Camera settings

FTP function / FTP transfer status

Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi

Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)

Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable

Airplane Mode

Overheating warning

Database file full / Database file error

3. Shooting settings

Aspect ratio
12M / 11M / 10M / 8M / 5.1M / 4.6M / 4.3M / 3.4M / 3.0M / 2.7M / 2.6M / 2M / 1.3M / 1.1M / 0.8M
Image size of still images

RAW recording
J-X.FINE J-FINE J-STD H-X.FINE H-FINE H-STD
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
4:2:2
Color sampling for HEIF
XAVC HS 4K XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD XAVC S-I 4K XAVC S-I HD XAVC S-I DCI 4K *
File format of movies
* When the camera’s system software (firmware) version is Ver.3.00 or later

119.88p 100p 59.94p 50p 29.97p 25p 23.98p 24.00p

Frame rate of movies

Record setting of movies

1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value
ISO400
ISO sensitivity
PASM
Exposure mode

Exposure compensation

Metering Mode
35mm

495
 Lens focal length

Creative Look
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Color temperature, Color filter)

D-Range Optimizer
HLG
HDR recording (Hybrid Log-Gamma)

Copyright information exists for image

4. Image information

Latitude/longitude information
2022-1-1 10:37:00PM
Date of recording
100-0003
Folder number - file number
C0003
Movie file number

Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)

Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

496
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

List of default setting values

The default setting values for each menu item at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
The content of the menu displayed on the screen differs depending on the shooting mode. For details, refer to “Finding
functions from MENU.”

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
The items that can be reset using [Camera Settings Reset] are limited. See the following tables. If you select [Initialize],
all the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.

(Shooting)

Resettable using
MENU items Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

JPEG/HEIF Switch JPEG

Image Quality Settings ( File Format) JPEG/HEIF

Image Quality Settings (RAW File Type) Compressed

Image Quality Settings (JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality) Fine

Image Quality Settings (JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size)

L: 12M
(when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2])

Image Quality Settings (JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size)

L: 11M
(when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3])

Image Quality Settings (JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size)

L: 10M
(when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9])

Image Quality Settings (JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size)

L: 8.0M
(when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [1:1])

Aspect Ratio 3:2

File Format XAVC S HD

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]

59.94p/50p
is set to [XAVC HS 4K])

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]

59.94p/50p
is set to [XAVC S 4K])

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]

59.94p/50p
is set to [XAVC S HD])

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]

59.94p/50p
is set to [XAVC S-I 4K])

497
 Resettable using
MENU items Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]

59.94p/50p
is set to [XAVC S-I HD])

Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]

24.00p
is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 45M 4:2:0 10bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

50M 4:2:0 10bit
set to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 200M 4:2:0 10bit
[119.88p]/[100p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 150M 4:2:0 8bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 60M 4:2:0 8bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

60M 4:2:0 8bit
set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 200M 4:2:0 8bit
[119.88p]/[100p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 50M 4:2:0 8bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 50M 4:2:0 8bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

50M 4:2:0 8bit
set to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 60M 4:2:0 8bit
[119.88p]/[100p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M
set to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M
set to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

240M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])

498
 Resettable using
MENU items Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

222M 4:2:2 10bit/185M
set to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

111M 4:2:2 10bit/93M
set to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

89M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M
set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M
set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 240M 4:2:2 10bit
[23.98p])

Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is

set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 240M 4:2:2 10bit
[24.00p])

S&Q Settings ( Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File

59.94p/50p
Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File

59.94p/50p
Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File

59.94p/50p
Format] is set to [XAVC S HD])

S&Q Settings ( Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File

59.94p/50p
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File

59.94p/50p
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD])

S&Q Settings ( Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File

24.00p
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]

120fps/100fps
is set to a format other than [XAVC S-I DCI 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]

24fps
is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 45M 4:2:0 10bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

499
 Resettable using
MENU items Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 50M 4:2:0 10bit
[23.98p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 200M 4:2:0 10bit
[119.88p]/[100p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 150M 4:2:0 8bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 60M 4:2:0 8bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 60M 4:2:0 8bit
[23.98p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 200M 4:2:0 8bit
[119.88p]/[100p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 50M 4:2:0 8bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 50M 4:2:0 8bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 50M 4:2:0 8bit
[23.98p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 60M 4:2:0 8bit
[119.88p]/[100p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 240M 4:2:2 10bit
[23.98p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

222M 4:2:2 10bit/185M
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[59.94p]/[50p])

500
 Resettable using
MENU items Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

111M 4:2:2 10bit/93M
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
4:2:2 10bit
[29.97p]/[25p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD], and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to 89M 4:2:2 10bit
[23.98p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is
4:2:2 10bit
set to [59.94p]/[50p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M
Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is
4:2:2 10bit
set to [29.97p]/[25p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is 240M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [23.98p])

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) (when [ File

Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K], and [Rec Frame Rate] is 240M 4:2:2 10bit
set to [24.00p])

Log Shooting Setting (Log Shooting) Off

Log Shooting Setting (Color Gamut)

Log Shooting Setting (Embed LUT File) On

Proxy Settings ( Proxy Recording) Off

Proxy Settings ( Proxy File Format) XAVC S HD

Proxy Settings ( Proxy Rec. Settings) (when [

9M 4:2:0 10bit
Proxy File Format] is set to [XAVC HS HD])

Proxy Settings ( Proxy Rec. Settings) (when [

6M 4:2:0 8bit
Proxy File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD])

Shooting Auto

Long Exposure NR On

High ISO NR Normal

HLG Still Image Off

Color Space sRGB

Lens Compensation (Shading Comp.) Auto

Lens Compensation (Chromatic Aberration Comp.) Auto

Lens Compensation (Distortion Comp.) Off

Lens Compensation (Breathing Comp.) Off

501
 Resettable using
MENU items Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Format ―

Rec. Media Settings ( Recording Media) Slot 1

Rec. Media Settings ( Recording Media) Slot 1

Rec. Media Settings (Auto Switch Media) Off

Recover Image DB*

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings
―
Reset] or [Initialize].

Display Media Info. ―

File/Folder Settings (File Number) Series

File/Folder Settings (Forced File Number Reset) ―

File/Folder Settings (Set File Name) DSC

File/Folder Settings (Folder Name) Standard Form

Select REC Folder ―

Create New Folder ―

IPTC Information (Write IPTC Info) Off

IPTC Information (Register IPTC Info) ―

Copyright Info (Write Copyright Info) Off

Copyright Info (Set Photographer) ―

Copyright Info (Set Copyright) ―

Copyright Info (Disp. Copyright Info) ―

Write Serial Number Off

File Settings (File Number) Series

File Settings (Series Counter Reset) ―

File Settings (File Name Format) Standard

File Settings (Cam ID + Reel# Settings) ―

File Settings (Title Name Settings) C

Exposure Mode Manual Exposure

Exposure Mode Manual Exposure

Exposure Ctrl Type Flexible Exp. Mode

Recall Camera Setting ―

Camera Set. Memory ―

502
 Resettable using
MENU items Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Memory/Recall Media Slot 1

Reg. Custom Shoot Set ―

Drive Mode Single Shooting

Bracket Settings (Selftimer during Bracket) Off

Bracket Settings (Bracket order) 0→-→+

Interval Shoot Func. (Interval Shooting) Off

Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Start Time) 1 Sec

Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Interval) 3 Sec

Interval Shoot Func. (Number of Shots) 30

Interval Shoot Func. (AE Tracking Sensitivity) Mid

Interval Shoot Func. (Shutter Type in Interval) Electronic Shutter

Interval Shoot Func. (Shoot Interval Priority) Off

Silent Mode Settings (Silent Mode) Off

Silent Mode Settings ([Aperture Drive in AF] under [Target

Standard
Function Settings])

Silent Mode Settings ([Auto Pixel Mapping] under [Target

Off
Function Settings])

Shutter Type Mechanical Shutter

e-Front Curtain Shut. On

Release w/o Lens Enable

Release w/o Card Enable

Anti-flicker Shoot. Off

Audio Recording On

Audio Rec Level 26

Audio Out Timing Live

Wind Noise Reduct. Off

Shoe Audio Set.

Time Code Preset 00:00:00.00

User Bit Preset 00 00 00 00

Time Code Format DF

Time Code Run Rec Run

503
 Resettable using
MENU items Default setting value [Camera Settings
Reset]

Time Code Make Preset

User Bit Time Rec Off

SteadyShot On

SteadyShot Standard

SteadyShot Adjust. Auto

Focal Length (when [ SteadyShot Adjust.] is set to

8mm
[Manual])

Zoom Range Optical zoom only

[ Zoom Lever Speed] ( 1st Zoom Spd. ) 3

[ Zoom Lever Speed] ( 2nd Zoom Spd. ) 8 (Fast)

[ Zoom Lever Speed] ( 1st Zoom Spd. ) 3

[ Zoom Lever Speed] ( 2nd Zoom Spd. ) 8 (Fast)

Custom Key Z. Speed (Fixed Speed ) 3

Custom Key Z. Speed (Fixed Speed ) 3

Remote Zoom Speed ( Speed Type) Variable

Remote Zoom Speed ( Fixed Speed ) 3

Remote Zoom Speed ( Fixed Speed ) 3

Grid Line Display Off

Grid Line Type Rule of 3rds Grid

Live View Display Set. (Live View Display) Setting Effect ON

Live View Display Set. (Exposure Effect) Exposure Set. & flash

Live View Display Set. (Frame Rate Low Limit) Off

Emphasized REC Display On

Marker Display Off

Center Marker Off

Aspect Marker Off

Safety Zone Off

Guideframe Off

(Exposure/Color)

504
 Resettable using [Camera Settings
MENU items Default setting value
Reset]

Auto Slow Shutter On

ISO ISO 100

ISO Range Limit ―

ISO AUTO Min. SS Standard

Base ISO ISO 800

Exposure Index (when [Base ISO] is set to [ISO

800EI / 6.0E
800])

Exposure Index (when [Base ISO] is set to [ISO

12800EI / 6.0E
12800])

Auto/Manual Swt. Set. (Av Auto/Manual Switch) Manual

Auto/Manual Swt. Set. (Tv Auto/Manual Switch) Manual

Auto/Manual Swt. Set. (ISO Auto/Manual Set) Manual

Exposure Comp. ±0.0

Exposure step 0.3EV

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Multi) ±0

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Center) ±0

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Spot) ±0

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Entire Screen

±0
Average)

Exposure Std. Adjust ( Highlight) ±0

Metering Mode Multi

Face Priority in Multi Metering On

Spot Metering Point Center

AEL w/ Shutter Auto

Flash Mode Autoflash

Flash Comp. ±0.0

Exp.comp.set Ambient&flash

Wireless Flash Off

Red Eye Reduction Off

External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Firing Set.) ―

External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Cust. Set.) ―

White Balance Auto

505
 Resettable using [Camera Settings
MENU items Default setting value
Reset]

Priority Set in AWB Standard

Shutter AWB Lock Off

Shockless WB 1 (Fast)

D-Range Optimizer:
D-Range Optimizer
Auto

Creative Look ST

Picture Profile PP11

Select LUT s709

Manage User LUTs ―

Zebra Display Off

Zebra Level 70

(Focus)

MENU items Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]

Focus Mode Automatic AF

Priority Set in AF-S Balanced Emphasis

Priority Set in AF-C Balanced Emphasis

AF Tracking Sensitivity 3(Standard)

AF Illuminator Auto

Aperture Drive in AF Standard

AF w/ Shutter On

Pre-AF Off

AF Transition Speed 5

AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity 5(Responsive)

AF Assist Off

Focus Area Wide

Focus Area Limit ―

Switch V/H AF Area Off

Focus Area Color White

AF Area Registration Off

Del. Regist. AF Area ―

AF Area Auto Clear Off

506
 MENU items Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]

AF-C Area Display On

Phase Detect. Area Off

Circ. of Focus Point Does Not Circulate

AF Frame Move Amt Standard

Face/Eye Prior. in AF On

Face/Eye Subject Human

Right/Left Eye Select Auto

Face/Eye Frame Disp. Off

Face Memory ―

Regist. Faces Priority On

Auto Magnifier in MF On

Focus Magnifier ―

Focus Magnif. Time No Limit

Initial Focus Mag. x1.0

AF in Focus Mag. On

Initial Focus Mag. x1.0

Peaking Display Off

Peaking Level Mid

Peaking Color White

(Playback)
To reset the items for [Playback] to the default values, select [Initialize]. These items are not reset to the default values
even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Select Playback Media ―

View Mode Date View

Enlarge Image ―

Enlarge Initial Mag. Standard. Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position Focused Position

Protect ―

Rating ―

Rating Set(Custom Key) ―

507
 MENU items Default setting value

Delete ―

Delete pressing twice Off

Delete confirm. "Cancel" first

Rotate ―

Copy ―

Photo Capture ―

JPEG/HEIF Switch JPEG

Cont. Play for Interval —

Play Speed for Interval 5

Slide Show (Repeat) Off

Slide Show (Interval) 3 Sec

Image Index 9 Images

Display as Group Off

Display Rotation Auto

Focus Frame Display Off

Disp Specified Time Img. —

Image Jump Setting ( Front dial) One by one

Image Jump Setting ( Rear dial) One by one

(Network)
To reset the items for [Network] to the default values, select [Initialize] or [Reset Network Set.]. These items are not reset
to the default values even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Smartphone Connection —

PC Remote Function (PC Remote) Off

PC Remote Function (Pairing) ―

PC Remote Function (Wi-Fi Direct Info.) ―

Select on Cam & Send ( Send) ―

Select on Cam & Send (Size of Sending Image) 2M

Select on Cam & Send (RAW+J/H Send Target) JPEG & HEIF

Select on Cam & Send ( Sending Target) Proxy Only

Reset Transfer Status —

508
 MENU items Default setting value

Cnct. while Power OFF Off

Remote Shoot Setting (Still Img. Save Dest.) Dest.+Camera

Remote Shoot Setting (Save Image Size) 2M

Remote Shoot Setting (RAW+J Save Image) JPEG Only

Remote Shoot Setting (RAW+H Save Image) HEIF Only

FTP Transfer Func. (FTP Function) Off

FTP Transfer Func. (Server Setting) Server 1

FTP Transfer Func. (Save/Load FTP Settings) ―

FTP Transfer Func. ([Target Group] under [FTP Transfer]) This Date

FTP Transfer Func. ([Still Images/Movies] under [FTP Transfer]) All

FTP Transfer Func. ([Target Img (Rating)] under [FTP Transfer]) ―

FTP Transfer Func. ([Target Movie ( )] under [FTP Transfer]) All

FTP Transfer Func. ([Target Img (Protect)] under [FTP Transfer]) All

FTP Transfer Func. ([Transfer Status] under [FTP Transfer]) All

FTP Transfer Func. (Display FTP Error Info.) ―

FTP Transfer Func. (Display FTP Result) ―

FTP Transfer Func. (Auto FTP Transfer) Off

FTP Transfer Func.(Auto FTP Target) Still Image

FTP Transfer Func. (RAW+J/H Transfer Target) JPEG & HEIF

FTP Transfer Func. ( Transfer Target) Proxy Only

FTP Transfer Func. (FTP Power Save) Off

Wi-Fi Connect Off

WPS Push ―

Access Point Set. ―

Wi-Fi Frequency Band 2.4GHz

Display Wi-Fi Info. ―

SSID/PW Reset ―

Bluetooth Function Off

Pairing ―

Manage Paired Device ―

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl Off

509
 MENU items Default setting value

Disp Device Address ―

IP Address Setting Auto

Display Wired LAN Info. ―

USB-LAN Connection ―

USB-LAN Disconnection ―

Tethering Connection ―

Tethering Disconnection ―

Airplane Mode Off

Edit Device Name ―

Import Root Certificate ―

Access Authen. Settings (Access Authen.) On

Access Authen. Settings (User) ―

Access Authen. Settings (Password) ―

Access Authen. Settings (Generate Password) ―

Access Authen. Info ―

Security(IPsec) (IPsec) Off

Security(IPsec) (Dest. IP Address) ―

Security(IPsec) (Shared Key) ―

Reset Network Set. ―

(Setup)
To reset the items for [Setup] to the default values, select [Initialize]. These items are not reset to the default values even
if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Language ―

Area/Date/Time Setting (Area Setting) ―

Area/Date/Time Setting (Daylight Savings) Off

Area/Date/Time Setting (Date/Time) ―

Area/Date/Time Setting (Date Format) ―

NTSC/PAL Selector ―

Setting Reset ―

Save/Load Settings ―

510
 MENU items Default setting value

Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Front dial) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Rear dial) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Control Wheel) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 1) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 2) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 3) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 4) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 5) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 6) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Multi-Slc Center Btn) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Center Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Left Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Right Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Down Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Focus Hold Button) Follow Custom ( )

Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Front dial) Aperture

Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Rear dial) ISO/EI

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Control Wheel) Shutter Speed

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 1) L.PressAv Auto/Manual

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 2) White Balance

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 3) L.PressISO Auto/Manual

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 4) Not set

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 5) Focus Magnifier

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 6) Movie Shooting

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Multi-Slc Center Btn) Focus Standard

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Center Button) Not set

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Left Button) Zebra Display Select

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Right Button) Peaking Display Select

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Down Button) L.PressTv Auto/Manual

Custom Key/Dial Set. (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting

511
 MENU items Default setting value

Custom Key/Dial Set. (Focus Hold Button) Focus Hold

Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 1) Follow Custom ( / )

Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 2) Follow Custom ( / )

Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 3) Follow Custom ( / )

Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 5) Follow Custom ( / )

Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 6) Follow Custom ( / )

Custom Key Setting (MOVIE Button) Follow Custom ( / )

Custom Key Setting (Fn Button) Not set

Fn Menu Settings ―

Different Set for Still/Mv ―

DISP (Screen Disp) Set ―

REC w/ Shutter Off

Zoom Ring Rotate Left(W)/Right(T)

Custom Key/Dial Set. ―

Custom Key/Dial Set. ―

My Dial Settings ―

Av/Tv Rotate Normal

Function Ring(Lens) Power Focus

Lock Operation Parts Off

Touch Operation On

Touch Sensitivity Standard

Swipe Up Open the Fn Menu

Touch Func. in Shooting Touch Tracking

Monitor Brightness Manual

Display Quality Standard

Monitor Flip Direction Auto

TC/UB Disp. Setting TC

Gamma Display Assist Off

Gamma Disp. Assist Typ. Auto

Display LUT On

De-Squeeze Display Off

512
 MENU items Default setting value

Remain Shoot Display Not Displayed

Auto Review Off

Display File Name On

Power Save Start Time Off

Auto Power OFF Temp. Standard

Volume Settings 7

4ch Audio Monitoring CH1/CH2

Audio signals On

USB Connection Mode Sel. When Connect

USB LUN Setting Multi

USB Power Supply On

HDMI Resolution Auto

HDMI Output Settings (Rec. Media dur HDMI Output) On

HDMI Output Settings (Output Resolution) Auto

HDMI Output Settings (4K Output Set.(HDMI Only)) 59.94p 10bit/50p 10bit

HDMI Output Settings (RAW Output) Off

HDMI Output Settings (RAW Output Setting) 59.94p/50p

HDMI Output Settings (Time Code Output) Off

HDMI Output Settings (REC Control) Off

HDMI Output Settings (4ch Audio Output) CH1/CH2

HDMI Info. Display On

CTRL FOR HDMI On

Video Light Mode Power Link

REC Lamp All On

Fan Control Auto

IR Remote Ctrl Off

Sensor Cleaning ―

Auto Pixel Mapping On

Pixel Mapping ―

Version ―

Display Serial Number ―

513
 (My Menu)
To reset the items for [My Menu] to the default values, select [Initialize] or [Delete All]. These items are not reset to the
default values even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Add Item ―

Sort Item ―

Delete Item ―

Delete Page ―

Delete All ―

Display From My Menu Off

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

514
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Specifications

Camera

[System]
Camera Type
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
Lens
Sony E-mount lens

[Image sensor]
Image format
35 mm full frame (35.6 mm × 23.8 mm), CMOS image sensor

Effective pixel number of camera

Approx. 12 100 000 pixels

Total pixel number of camera

Approx. 12 900 000 pixels

[SteadyShot]
System
In-camera sensor shift image stabilization system

[Anti-Dust]
System
Anti-dust function based on antistatic coating and ultrasonic vibration

[Auto focus system]

Detection system
Phase-detection system/Contrast detection system
Sensitivity Range
–6 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent, F2.0)
AF illuminator
Approx. 0.3 m to 3.0 m (When using an FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS)

[Monitor]
LCD monitor
7.5 cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch panel
Total number of dots
1 440 000 dots

[Exposure control]
Metering method
515
1 200-zone evaluative metering
Metering Range
–3 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent with F2.0 lens)
ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images: ISO 80 to ISO 102 400 (Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 40, maximum ISO 409 600), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 80 to
ISO 12 800, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)
Movies: ISO 80 to ISO 102 400 equivalent (Extended ISO: maximum equivalent to ISO 409 600), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 80 to
ISO 12 800 equivalent, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)

Exposure compensation
±5.0 EV (switchable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV steps)

[Shutter]
Type
Electronically-controlled, vertical-traverse, focal-plane type
Speed range
Still images: 1/8 000 second to 30 seconds, BULB
Movies: 1/8 000 second to 1/4 second (1/3 EV step)
60p-compatible devices: up to 1/60 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/30 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
50p-compatible devices: up to 1/50 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/25 second in Auto slow shutter mode)

Flash sync speed

1/250 second (when using a flash manufactured by Sony)

[Continuous shooting]
Continuous shooting speed
(Continuous Shooting: Hi+) : Maximum of approx. 10 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Hi):
Maximum of approx. 8 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Mid): Maximum of approx. 6 images per second/
(Continuous Shooting: Lo): Maximum of approx. 3 images per second
Based on our measurement conditions. The speed of continuous shooting can be slower, depending on the shooting
conditions.

[Recording format]
File format
JPEG (compliant with DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif Ver. 2.32, and MPF Baseline), HEIF (MPEG-A MIAF compliant), RAW (Sony
ARW 4.0 format compliant)
Movie (XAVC HS format)
XAVC Ver2.0: MP4 format compliant
Video: MPEG-H HEVC/H.265
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit), LPCM 4ch (48 kHz 24 bit)*1, LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 24 bit)*1, MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch*2
Movie (XAVC S format)
XAVC Ver2.0: MP4 format compliant
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit), LPCM 4ch (48 kHz 24 bit)*1, LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 24 bit)*1, MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch*2
*1 When using the XLR handle unit (supplied) or when using accessories that can support 4-channel output and 24 bits with the multi-interface
shoe
*2 Proxy movies

[Recording media]
CFexpress Type A memory cards, SD cards

[Slot]

516
SLOT 1/SLOT 2
Slot for CFexpress Type A memory cards, SD cards (UHS-I and UHS-II compatible)
Supports operations between two memory cards.

[Input/output terminals]
USB Type-C terminal
SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2)
Compatible with USB Power Delivery
Multi/Micro USB Terminal*
Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0)
* Supports Micro USB compatible devices.

HDMI
HDMI type A jack
(Microphone) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
(Headphones) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack

[Power, general]
Rated input
7.2 V

Power consumption
Using an FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS
Approx. 3.4 W (while shooting still images)/approx. 7.3 W (while shooting movies)

Operating temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to 55 °C (–4 °F to 131 °F)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.)
129.7 × 77.8 × 84.5 mm
5 1/8 × 3 1/8 × 3 3/8 in.
Mass (Approx.)
715 g (1 lb 9.3 oz) (including battery pack, SD card)

Microphone
Stereo
Speaker
Monaural
Exif Print
Compatible
PRINT Image Matching III
Compatible

[Wireless LAN]
WW728473 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)
Supported format
IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac
Frequency band
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz

517
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode

WW558244 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)

Supported format
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
Security
WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode

[NFC]
Tag type
NFC Forum Type 3 Tag compliant

[Bluetooth communications]
Bluetooth standard Ver. 5.0

Frequency band
2.4 GHz

XLR handle unit

INPUT1/INPUT2 jack
3-pin XLR/TRS, female type
INPUT3 jack
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
Mass (Approx.)
300 g (10.6 oz)

Battery charger BC-QZ1

Rated input
100 – 240 V , 50/60 Hz, 0.38 A
Rated output
8.4 V , 1.6 A

Rechargeable battery pack NP-FZ100

Rated voltage
7.2 V

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

518
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Trademarks

is a trademark of Sony Group Corporation.

XAVC S and are trademarks of Sony Group Corporation.
XAVC HS and are trademarks of Sony Group Corporation.
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
The CFexpress Type A logo is a trademark licensed by the CompactFlash Association.
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Sony Group Corporation and its subsidiaries is under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be used in all cases in this
manual.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

519
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

License

Notes on the License

This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners of that software. Based
on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the
following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage
connection between the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A
CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTPS://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

Covered by one or more claims of the HEVC patents listed at patentlist.accessadvance.com.

On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software

The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPLv2 and other licenses
which may require access to source code. You may find a copy of the relevant source code as required under the GPLv2
(and other licenses) at https://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/.

You may obtain the source code as required by the GPLv2 on a physical medium from us for a period of three years after
our last shipment of this product by applying through the form at https://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/.
This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

520
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Troubleshooting

If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.

1 Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.

2 Initialize the settings.

3 Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this product and answers
to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
https://www.sony.net/

Related Topic
Setting Reset

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

521
Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILME-FX3 Ver.2 or later

Warning messages

Set Area/Date/Time.

Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the internal rechargeable
backup battery.

Power insufficient.

The image copying or the image sensor cleaning function will not operate because the remaining battery level is too
low. Recharge the battery pack or supply power by connecting the camera with a computer, etc.

Unable to use memory card. Format?

The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select [Enter] and then format the
memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may
take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.

Memory Card Error

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.

Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.

Memory card locked.

You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the switch set to the LOCK
position. Set the switch to the record position.

Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.

No memory card has been inserted into the memory card slot selected in [ Recording Media] or [ Recording
Media].
To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this
case, images will not be saved.

This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Processing...

When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any further shooting during this
reduction process.

Unable to display.

Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be displayed.
522
 Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies in the image database
files. Repair the image database files.
Check that a lens is mounted. For an unsupported lens, set "Release w/o Lens" in the menu to "Enable".

The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message appears when a lens is attached,
reattach the lens. If the message appears frequently, check whether the contacts of the lens and product are clean or
not.
When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or similar instrument, or using an unsupported lens, set [
Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].

Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.

The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power off and cool the product
and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.

(Overheating warning)

You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.

(Database file error)

The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the product is possible.

(Database file error)

Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer and recover the memory card.

Image DataBase File error

There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [
Recover Image DB].

System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.

Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult local authorized Sony
service facility.

Image Database File error. Recover?

You cannot record and play back a movie because the Image Database File is damaged. Recover the Image
Database File following the on-screen instructions.

Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.

Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.

Cannot create more folders.

A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more folders on this camera.

(Cooling fan malfunction warning)

The cooling fan has malfunctioned. Please seek repair service.

The cooling fan is malfunctioning. Consult a local authorized Sony service facility.

Related Topic
523
Notes on memory card
Performing initial setup for the camera
Format
Release w/o Card
Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)

5-043-414-13(1) Copyright 2022 Sony Corporation

524